2011 Technical Binder

Philips Dynalite

Lighting Systems and Controls

t +61 2 8338 9899 f +61 2 8338 9333 [email protected] www.philips.com/dynalite

Dear Colleague,

Welcome to our updated Technical Binder; your complete guide to the Philips Dynalite

award-winning range of innovative lighting control products.

As an industry leader in the creation of energy efficient and innovative lighting control solutions, this technical binder is just

one way Philips Dynalite brings you comprehensive advice on enhancing the design and functionality of your next project.

Our world-leading products succeed because they bring together scalability, flexibility and innovation, in a smart way to get

better results for our customers. Inside, you’ll discover how Philips Dynalite control solutions can work for you.

SecTion one is designed to assist you in accessing additional, valuable marketing collateral.

SecTion TWo contains comprehensive information on our complete range of hardware and software products that

enable standard and advanced levels of lighting control, energy management and seamless integration with third-party

systems.

SecTion Three contains updated application guides based on real-world applications; scenarios you’ll probably

encounter on a daily basis. The guides contain simple advice and techniques for getting the best result for your project.

We’ll be regularly adding to and updating this section as technologies change. Of course, timely advice is always available

from your local Philips Dynalite contact or the website.

SecTion Four contains technical guides with practical information on how the system goes together, control principles,

load compatibility, programming methods, systems integration and more.

As we invest heavily in research and development, we are constantly introducing new products and using the latest

technology as a platform for growth and we’ll endeavour to regularly update this technical binder. Naturally, you’ll find the

most up-to-date product information on our website.

I’m confident the user-friendly information in this technical binder will inspire you to select Philips Dynalite as your controls

solution in any future project – from a simple one dimmer, one panel system through to a huge multi-channel network.

Finally, don’t forget to take advantage of our advisory service, which offers you our expertise on the most cost-effective

ways to design a control system that meets the needs of your project.

I hope you enjoy using this technical binder.

Peter GlasheenGlobal Marketing Manager

Philips Dynalite

ContentsSection 1 Marketing Collateral

Philips Dynalite Corporate Profile

An Introduction to the Philips Dynalite Control System

Marketing Collateral Overview

Section 2 Technical Data Sheets

User InterfacesDR2PA Revolution Series User Control Panels - AU/US Size

DR2PE Revolution Series User Control Panels - EU/UK Size

DPN Classic Series User Control Panels - AU/US Size

DPNE Classic Series User Control Panels - EU/UK Size

DPN-SF Classic Series User Control Panels - AU/US Size

DPNE-SF Classic Series User Control Panels - EU/UK Size

DLP Standard Series User Control Panels - AU/US Size

DLPE Standard Series User Control Panels - EU/UK Size

DL2P Standard Series User Control Panels - AU/US size

DPWE Standard Series User Control Panels - EU/UK Size

DTP100 Colour Touchscreen

DTP170 Colour Touchscreen

DTC602 & DTCE602 Timer Clock

DDTC001 Timer Clock

DUS804C Multifunction Sensor

DUS804C-UP Multifunction Sensor

DUS704 Universal Sensors

DTS900 & DTS900M Temperature Sensors

Relay and Multi-use ControllersDMRC210 2 x 10 Amp Relay Controller

DDRC810-GL 8 x 10 Amp Relay Controller

DDRC810DT-GL 8 x 10 Amp Mulit-use Relay Controller

DDRC420FR 4 x 20 Amp Relay Controller

DDRC820FR 8 x 20 Amp Relay Controller

DDRC1220FR-GL 12 x 20 Amp Relay Controller

DRC1205 12 x 5 Amp Relay Controller

DRC810DT 8 x 10 Amp Relay Controller

DRC1210 & DRC1220GL 12 x 10 Amp & 12 x 20 Amp Relay Controllers

Leading Edge Dimmer ControllersDDLE802 8 x 2 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller

DLE1203 12 x 3 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller




DLE1210GL 12 x 10 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller


DLE120-S 1 x 20 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller

DLE220-S 2 x 20 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller

DLE1220GL-S 12 x 20 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller

Contents continuedTrailing Edge Dimmer ControllersDTE310 3 x 10 Amp Trailing Edge Dimmer Controller

DTE1210 12 x 10 Amp Trailing Edge Dimmer Controller

Signal Dimmer ControllersDDBC516FR Dimmer Controller

DBC905 9 x 5 Amp Dimmer Controller

DDBC120FR-DALI Dimmer Controller

DDBC300-DALI Dimmer Controller


DMBC110 1 x 10 Amp Signal Dimmer & Relay Controller



DDBC1200 12 x Signal Dimmer Controller

DBC1210 & DBC1220GL 12 x 10 Amp & 12 x 20 Amp 1-10V/DSI Dimmer Controllers

LED PWM ControllersDDLEDC60035 6 x 350mA PWM Controller

DDLEDC401 4 x 1 Amp PWM Controller

DDLEDC605-GL 6 x 5 Amp PWM Controller

Multipurpose ControllersDDMC802 8 x 2 Amp Multipurpose Modular Controller

DDMC802GL 8 x 2 Amp Multipurpose Modular Controller

DDLE6RC202 6 x 2 Amp Leading Edge; 2 x 2 Amp relay Multipurpose Controller

DMC810GL 4 x 10 Amp Leading Edge; 4 x 1- Amp Signal Dimmer Multipurpose Controller

Integration DevicesDNG100BT Ethernet Gateway

DMNG100BT Ethernet Gateway

DDNG100BT Ethernet Gateway

DAC100BT Area Controller

DNG232 RS232 Network Gateway

DMNG232 RS232 Network Gateway

DDNG232 RS232 Network Gateway

DDNG485 Network Gateway

DDNI485 Network Passive Gateway

DNG485 RS485/DMX Gateway

DTK622 Network Gateway

DDNI-LON LON Gateway

DDNG-KNX KNX Network Gateway

DDNG-BACnet BACnet Network Gateway

DDMIDC8 Low Level Input Integrator

DPMI940 Dry Contact Gateway

DIR-TX8 Infra-red Transmitter

DDFCUC024 Fan Coil Unit Controller

Contents continuedEnvision SoftwareDLight III Server Gateway Integration Software

Network Devices & Commissioning ToolsDDNP1501 Network Power Supply

DDPB22RJ12 Network Junction Box

DyNet 305m Data Cable Pack

DyNetSFLAT6 200m Cable Roll and Cable Kits

DPP601 Portable Programmer

Section 3 Application Guides

Aged care

Apartment

Boardroom

Hotel ballroom

Lecture theatre

Luxury home

Office

Themed venue

Section 4 Technical Guides

Control principles

Emergency lighting

LED control

Load compatibility

Programming methods

Systems integration

1. Marketing C

ollateral

Philips Dynalite Marketing Collateral Section 1.1

Philips Dynalite control system

An introduction to thePhilips Dynalite Training Academy

Ecolinx An integrated lighting and energy management system

Apple iPad/ iPhone Applications for smart automation

DynamicTouch

Control solutions for hotels

Smart hotel. Smart return.

Use

r In

terf

aces

Networked Controls Product Catalogue

Removing complexity in lighting energy management

EcoSetAdvanced lighting controls made easy – save energy, increase productivity and optimise user comfort

Envision softwareSophisticated, productive, reliable and energy efficient lighting control solutions

Philips Dynalite

Philips Dynalite Corporate Profile A 12 page brochure providing an overview of Philips Dynalite, our market segments, locations, products and services.Part number: CORP-0008

Envision software An 8 page brochure on Envision – commissioning, operational and energy management software that makes your lighting programming a simple process.Part number: SW-0012

EcoSet A 6 page brochure on EcoSet – a networked lighting control system designed to leverage the benefits of occupancy based energy-savings technology.Part number: ECOS-0010

Networked Controls Product CatalogueAn 80 page comprehensive product catalogue on the Philips Dynalite product range and controls solutions.Part number: CAT-0015

Smart Hotel A 16 page brochure detailing Philips Dynalite’s solution for hotels – promoting guest comfort, brand differentiation and operational efficiency.Part number: HOSP-0013

DynamicTouchA 4 page brochure on DynamicTouch – Apple iPad and iPhone applications for smart automation.Part number: DT-0011

Ecolinx An 8 page brochure detailing Ecolinx, a fully integrated lighting energy management system for commercial environments.Part number: ECOL-0006

Philips Dynalite Training Academy A 24 page brochure that gives an overview of the Philips Dynalite training courses and their content.Part number: TRNG-0016

Indoor Network Controls Product CatalogueA 20 page brochure detailing the functionality of different applications and systems.Part number: TECH-0004

Marketing Collateral

Philips Dynalite Marketing CollateralSection 1.2

Please contact your local Philips Dynalite Representative to get a copy of our brochures.

N.B. Brochures and information within may vary in regions due to local customisation and product differentiation.

If brochures are updated or replaced, we will endeavour to send you the most up-to-date version available at time of ordering.

Philips DynaliteDimension ProgramGuide for Dealers

DD-0006-1110-BMAUS-2.5K

Bring to life your smart home experience!With a Philips Dynalite Dimension Dealer

To orDEr broCHurES

Smart Home A 6 page brochure for home owners on automation technologies and benefits of using a Philips Dynalite Dimension Dealer.Part number: HOME-0018

It all comes together with your Philips Dynalite Dimension Dealer

Smart Automation for all your applications

Energy management for commercial buildings

Energy Management for Commercial buildings A 24 page informational brochure on energy management for commercial environments. Includes: green rating tools, guidelines, strategies and Philips Dynalite management systems.Part number: EM-0017

Smart Automation for all your applicationsAn 8 page brochure targeting designers, architects, builders, electrical contractors and systems integrators. Highlights benefits of using a Dimension Dealer for all your smart automation projects.Part number: SMRT-0026

RevolutionRe-think, re-invent, re-define.

revolutionAn 8 page brochure detailing the Revolution Panels – providing the ultimate user interface solution delivering complete aesthetic and functional flexibility. Part number: GEN-0003

Philips Dynalite Dimension Program Guide for DealersA 12 page information brochure on becoming an accredited Philips Dynalite Dimension Dealer, member benefits, certification and training.Part number: DD-0006

LightnewsVolume 11

LightnewsLighting the way for ‘smart’ apartmentspage 16

New app for Apple devicespage 12

Westfield London:Lighting up an iconpage 14

The critical role of LED controlpage 18

Lightnews A Philips Dynalite global publication that is released three times a year. It includes the latest updates on products, news and projects.

Marketing Collateral

2. Technical Datasheets

User Interfaces

Providing end-users with an intuitive means of interaction with the lighting system, Philips Dynalite user interfaces come in a wide range of styles and finishes to match any project budget or décor requirements.

This range includes wall panels, touchscreens, universal sensors, timer clocks and temperature sensors.

DR2PARevolution Series

User Control Panels

The second generation DR2P Revolution series user control panels incorporate a clip-on cover fastening system which provides the ultimate in aesthetic design flexibility. DR2P series panels are available in a range of configurations including single column, which provides arrangements of one to eight buttons and double or triple column designs for up to twenty four buttons. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of button function. Button backlighting is also provided to illuminate engraved text, improving night time panel location and operation. Optional Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities are available, eliminating the need for separate sensors where IR remote control operation is required.

Supply12V DC 50mA from the DyNet network

Control Inputs1 x RS 485 DyNet serial port

Front Cover FinishesStandard: Brushed Stainless Steel, White Glass, Black Glass. An extensive designer range of cover finishes is also available, see page 4.

Button ColoursCharcoal grey, white or silver.

ComplianceCE, C-Tick

LED IndicatorsStatus indicator - BlueButton backlighting - White(Other colours available on request)

Operating Environment0-50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing

MaterialsBezel, Key Carrier and Grid Plate - PolycarbonateStandard Covers - see page 4.

WeightPacked weight 0.2kg

technical data

alternate cover finishes

The Philips Dynalite DR2P Revolution series user control panels include an extensive designer range of cover and button cap colour accessories. Available cover finishes include brushed stainless steel, white glass and black glass as standard and can encompass any finish imaginable; wood grain, processed stone, laminate, fabric as custom orders. To complement these finishes, button caps are available in silver, white and charcoal grey, providing a wide range of décor matching possibilities. A dedicated IR receive switch cap is also available.

DR2P-GXX-X-C-BG-R-BW-X-C-Entry Black Borosilicate Glass, Charcoal Buttons

DR2P-MXX-X-C-SS-R-BW-X-C-Bath1 Brushed Stainless Steel, Charcoal Buttons

DR2P-MXX-X-C-WE-R-BV-X-C-Bath3 White Powder Coated, Charcoal Buttons

DR2P-LXX-S-AB-R-BO-C-Lounge2 Antique Bronze, Silver Buttons

DR2P-LXX-S-SG-R-BO-C-Lounge1 White Optically Clear Glass, Silver Buttons


User Control Panels

dimensions

functionality All Philips Dynalite panels use a network protocol called Dynet to communicate with other network devices. This dedicated lighting control protocol allows panels to communicate directly with each other, lighting load controllers and other integration devices. This network architecture is not dependant on a central processor, so there is no single point of network failure and makes for more efficient commissioning of the system features. Every Philips Dynalite user interface is capable of performing both simple and advanced functions without the need for additional network devices. Each button on the panel has a range of standard control options that can be individually configured to perform features such as toggle lighting on/off, ramp of lighting up/down, changing an area scene and perform virtual room joins. By using these built-in functions end users can take full control of their site. The Philips Dynalite panel range also supports inbuilt tasking which allows the panels to perform multiple complex functions from the press of a single button. A task triggered from a single button press may be used to affect an entire system changing the lighting scenes in many different areas, initiating a “PANIC” mode or perform some more complex function such as requesting information from other devices like a network timer clock, then sending out the required scene for the particular season. Tasks can be programmed into the panels during commissioning of the system that allows the end-user to interact with the lighting control system more intuitively and allows one button press to perform multiple functions for true automation.

70

28.3

74.6

117

13.6 5.4

20.6 43

84

Single Gang 1 Column


User Control Panels

User requirements can shift over time and necessitate changes to, or additions of, buttons on an existing panel. Button column assemblies and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated, without the need for any special tools or extra wiring.

snap-on finish accessories

Button column assemblies and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated.

Single Gang Landscape 3 Column

Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]


User Control Panels

panel ordering information

DR2PA Data Sheet Rev G April 2011

Detailed below are the DR2P configuration option product codes. Use these codes to specify your requirements.

DR2PA-MXX-X-C-WE-P-BW-X-C-Bath3

Series Description

DR2PA AsiaPac

DR2PE European/UK

IR Keycaps

X Not fitted

I Fitted**

Option Description

BW Blue Indicator LED & White Backlight – only for charcoal buttons

BO Blue Indicator LED & Orange Backlight – all button colours

R 2 x RJ12 DyNet Sockets

P Pluggable Screw Terminal

Option Description

X No Dipswitches fitted

C Custom Engraving

S Standard Engraving#

X No Engraving

Cover Finish Description

SS Brushed Stainless Steel

BG Black Borosilicate Glass

SG White Optically Clear Starfire Glass

PB Polished Brass (Gold Plated Polished Stainless)

AB Antique Bronze

WE White (Powder Coated Stainless)

MS Mirrored Stainless

XX No Cover

Button Colour

Description

W White

C Charcoal

S Silver

Panel Description – shown if Custom Engraving option taken – maximum 8 characters

A B C D E F G

H I J K L M Q* R*

ON/OFFOFF

ON

OFF

ON

2 2

2

2

2

2

2 2 2

3

3

3 3 3 3

4

4 4 4 14 1

5 5 25 2

6 3OFF OFF

2

3OFFOFF OFF

OFFOFF

OFF

OFFOFF

OFF

OFF

11

1

1

11

1 1 1

1

* OLEDs come standard configuration as non-programmed. e.g. include applications for HVAC and AV control. Maximum one OLED per panel and always the right hand side column.

# Note: If ‘Standard’ Engraving chosen then buttons will be engraved as shown above for single column panels. In case of 2 & 3 column panels then numbering will start at top most left hand button and continue to bottom most right hand numbered button.

** If IR receive switch cap fitted then button colour choice must be charcoal.

DR2PERevolution Series

User Control Panels

The second generation DR2PE series user control panels incorporate a revolutionary clip-on cover fastening system which provides the ultimate in aesthetic design flexibility. DR2PE series panels are available in a range of configurations including single column, which provides arrangements of one to eight buttons and double or triple column designs for up to twenty four buttons. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of button function. Button backlighting is also provided to illuminate engraved text, improving night time panel location and operation. Optional Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities are available, eliminating the need for separate sensors where IR remote control operation is required.



Front Cover FinishesStandard: Brushed Stainless Steel, White Glass, Black Glass. An extensive designer range of cover finishes is also available, see page 4.

Button ColoursCharcoal grey, white or silver.


LED IndicatorsStatus indicator - BlueButton backlighting - White or Orange for Charcoal Grey buttons - Orange only for White or Silver buttons


MaterialsBezel, Key Carrier and Grid Plate - PolycarbonateStandard Covers - see page 4


technical data

alternate cover finishes

The Philips Dynalite DR2PE Revolution series user control panels include an extensive designer range of cover and button cap colour accessories. Available cover finishes include brushed stainless steel, white glass and black glass as standard and can encompass any finish imaginable; wood grain, processed stone, laminate, fabric as custom orders. To complement these finishes, button caps are available in silver, white and charcoal grey, providing a wide range of décor matching possibilities. A dedicated IR receive switch cap is also available.

DR2PE-MXX-X-C-SS-P-BW-X-C-Bath1 Stainless Steel, Charcoal Buttons

DR2PE-GXX-X-C-BG-P-BW-X-C-Entry Black Borosilicate Glass, Charcoal Buttons

DR2PE-LXX-X-S-SG-P-BO-X-C-Lounge1 White Optically Clear Glass, Silver Buttons

DR2PE-LXX-X-C-PB-P-BW-X-C-Level4Polishes Brass, White Buttons

DR2PE-JXX-X-C-MS-P-BW-X-C-Study2Mirrored Stainless, White Buttons

DR2PE-LXX-X-S-AB-P-BO-X-C-Lounge2Antique Bronze, Silver Buttons

DR2PE-MXX-X-C-WE-P-BW-X-C-Bath3White Powder Coated, Charcoal Buttons


User Control Panels

dimensions


Single Gang 1 Column

28.3

50

50

R30

60.3 88.4

88.

4

5.4 12.5

20.7


User Control Panels

User requirements can shift over time and necessitate changes to or additions of, buttons on an existing panel. Button column assemblies and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated, without the need for any special tools or extra wiring.

snap-on finish accessories

Button column assemblies and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated.

Double Gang 3 Column




User Control Panels

panel ordering information Detailed below are the DR2P configuration option product codes. Use these codes to specify your requirements.

DR2PE Data Sheet Rev J April 2011

DR2PE-MXX-X-C-WE-P-BW-X-C-Bath3

Series Description

DR2PA AsiaPac

DR2PE European/UK

IR Keycaps

X Not fitted

I Fitted**

Option Description

BW Blue Indicator LED & White Backlight – only for charcoal buttons

BO Blue Indicator LED & Orange Backlight – all button colours

R 2 x RJ12 DyNet Sockets

P Pluggable Screw Terminal

Option Description

X No Dipswitches fitted

C Custom Engraving

S Standard Engraving#

X No Engraving

A B C D E F G

H I J K L M Q* R*

Cover Finish Description

SS Brushed Stainless Steel

BG Black Borosilicate Glass

SG White Optically Clear Starfire Glass

PB Polished Brass (Gold Plated Polished Stainless)

AB Antique Bronze

WE White (Powder Coated Stainless)

MS Mirrored Stainless

XX No Cover

Button Colour

Description

W White

C Charcoal

S Silver

Panel Description – shown if Custom Engraving option taken – maximum 8 characters

ON/OFFOFF

ON

OFF

ON

2 2

2

2

2

2

2 2 2

3

3

3 3 3 3

4

4 4 4 14 1

5 5 25 2

6 3OFF OFF

2

3OFFOFF OFF

OFFOFF

OFF

OFFOFF

OFF

OFF

11

1

1

11

1 1 1

1

* OLEDs come standard configuration as non-programmed. e.g. include applications for HVAC and AV control. Maximum one OLED per panel and always the right hand side column.

# Note: If ‘Standard’ Engraving chosen then buttons will be engraved as shown above for single column panels. In case of 2 & 3 column panels then numbering will start at top most left hand button and continue to bottom most right hand numbered button.

** If IR receive switch cap fitted then button colour choice must be charcoal.

Mirrored Stainless Steel

Gold Plated Stainless Steel

Coated Solid Brass

DPNClassic Series

User Control Panels

Philips Dynalite DPN series user control panels are a popular choice for commercial and residential applications, providing integrated automation solutions. These robust panels are supplied as standard in a brushed stainless steel finish, with square button caps in silver, black bezel and black engraving. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of button function. Custom design, finish and capability options further enhance the DPN series, offering superior choice and functionality.


Front Cover FinishesBrushed Stainless Steel (standard),Gold Plated Stainless Steel,Mirrored Stainless Steel,Coated Solid Brass plated,Powdercoated colours and other metal finishes available upon request.

Button ColoursSilver (standard), Charcoal Grey

LED IndicatorsBlue (standard), Green or Red. Other colours available on request.

Operating Climate0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non-condensing


MaterialsPlate - Stainless Steel or Solid BrassButton Cap - Metallized ABS plastic


technical data

custom panels The Philips Dynalite DPN user control panels are available ex-stock in 13 standard layouts (see overleaf). Occasionally, the specific requirements of a project call for a panel not found within the standard range. Philips Dynalite DPN custom panels can be easily designed using any of the following components. Consult your Philips Dynalite dealer for advice.

Keyswitch: Provides dry contact inputs to the control panel micro-processor board. Commonly used to lock out the functionality of a panel so that only authorised users can access the panel or a particular function. They are generally used for partition control, panic switches or panel enable/disable.

Mechanical Fader: Faders are used to control the level of an individual channel or as a ‘master’ fader to control an entire room or area. The position of the fader gives a visual indication of the light level. Preset scenes are programmed by adjusting light levels using the faders, then pressing and holding the corresponding scene button for several seconds.

Button Fader: Provides individual channel level control, combined with the flexibility to allow ‘join’ of fader panels.

Network Socket: An RJ12 socket that facilitates connection of a computer to the DyNet network.

Engraving: Panel engraving is used to clarify the functionality of a panel using words or diagrams. Engraving is available in black or white lettering, either on button caps or the panel fascia. Each button cap can accommodate up to seven characters.

DPNClassic Series

User Control Panels


dimensions

115

72

33.6

69.

1

16.1 30.3

1.6

84

48.4

DPNClassic Series

User Control Panels

User requirements can shift over time and necessitate changes to or additions of, buttons on an existing panel. Buttons, bezels and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated, without the need for any tools or extra wiring.

standard panel configurations

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPN308DyNet Network SocketButton: NonePlate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPN914On/Off ToggleButton: On/OffPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPN921On, OffButtons: On, OffPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPN941PresetButtons: 1-3, OffPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPN963Preset, Ramp Up, Ramp DownButtons: 1-3, Off, Up, Down. Plate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox


PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPN982ProgrammingButtons: 1-4, Off, Up, Down, Program. Plate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPN982DProgramming, KeyswitchButtons: 1-4, Up, Down, Off, Program. Plate: Panel Enable/DisableH 115mm x W 118mm2 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPN981DNPreset, Keyswitch, Network SocketButtons: 1-7, OffPlate: Panel Enable/DisableH 115mm x W 118mm2 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPN9103Preset, Ramp Up, Ramp DownButtons: 1-7, Off, Up, DownPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 118mm2 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox


PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPN9122ProgrammingButtons: 1-8, Off, Up, Down, Program. Plate: BlankH 115mm x W 118mm2 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox


ON/OFF

ON

OFF

1

2

3

OFF

1

2

3

4

1 5

2 6

3 7

4 OFF

1

2

3

4

OFF

PROGRAM

1

2

3

4

ENABLE

DISABLE

OFF

PROGRAM

PANEL

1

2

3

4

ENABLE

DISABLE

PANEL

5

6

7

OFF

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

OFF

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

9

10

11

OFF8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

OFF

OFF

PROGRAM

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

9

10

11

8

13

14

15

OFF12

For further information contact:



DPNClassic Series

User Control Panels

panel ordering information In addition to the standard layout codes provided on page 3, the following non-stock items may be ordered using the corresponding catalogue numbers..

stock engraved individual button caps

DPN Data Sheet Rev E April 2011

DPN926 2 Button 2 Room Join Panel DPN951F4 5 Button Preset 4 Fader PanelDPN908J 0 Button Panel with 2 Room Join Keyswitch DPN951F6 5 Button Preset 6 Fader PanelDPN908J3 0 Button Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch DPN951F8 5 Button Preset 8 Fader PanelDPN941F1 4 Button Preset Panel with Single Fader DPN951F12 5 Button Preset 12 Fader PanelDPN941D 4 Button Preset Panel with Panel Enable Keyswitch DPN981D 8 Button Preset with Panel Enable KeyswitchDPN941N 4 Button Preset Panel with DyNet Socket DPN981J 8 Button Preset Panel with 2 Room Join KeyswitchDPN941J 4 Button Preset Panel with 2 Room Join Keyswitch DPN981J3 8 Button Preset Panel with 3 Room Join KeyswitchDPN941J3 4 Button Preset Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch DPN981N 8 Button Preset Panel with DyNet SocketDPN946 4 Button 3 Room Join Panel DPN982J 8 Button Program Panel with 2 Room Join KeyswitchDPN946D 4 Button 3 Room Join Panel with Disable Keyswitch DPN982J3 8 Button Program Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch

Engraving Detail Silver with LED Charcoal Grey with LED Silver without LED Charcoal Grey without LED

None (Blank) 900-011 900-009 900-005 900-0031 270-046 270-026 - -2 270-053 270-030 - -3 270-054 270-031 - -4 270-055 270-032 - -5 270-056 270-033 - -6 270-057 270-034 - -7 270-058 270-035 - -8 270-059 270-036 - -9 270-060 270-037 - -10 270-047 270-027 - -11 270-048 - - -12 270-049 - - -13 270-050 - - -14 270-051 - - -15 270-052 - - -

270-075 270-044 270-023 270-017270-067 270-038 270-019 270-013

ON 270-072 270-042 - -OFF 270-071 270-041 270-021 270-015

ON/OFF 270-073 - - -MANUAL 270-068 270-039 - -

DAY 270-066 - - -NIGHT 270-070 - - -

SECURITY 270-074 - - -CLEAN 270-065 - - -

PROGRAM - - 270-022 270-016

custom engraved individual button caps Engraving details must accompany order - consult your Philips Dynalite Dealer for advice.

Style Silver Charcoal Greywith LED window 270-089 270-088without LED window 270-087 270-086

DPN***-MS Mirrored Stainless Steel FinishDPN***-GS Gold Plated Stainless Steel FinishDPN***-BS Coated Solid Brass FinishDPN***-PC Custom Powdercoat Finish - consult your Philips Dynalite Dealer for advice

alternate finishes

DPNEClassic Series

User Control Panels

Philips Dynalite DPNE series user control panels are a popular choice for commercial and residential applications, providing integrated automation solutions. These robust panels are supplied as standard in a brushed stainless steel finish, with square button caps in silver, black surround and black engraving. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of button function. Custom design, finish and capability options further enhance the DPNE series, offering superior choice and functionality.









technical data

custom panels The Philips Dynalite DPNE user control panels are available ex-stock in 13 standard layouts (see overleaf). Occasionally, the specific requirements of a project call for a panel not found within the standard range. Philips Dynalite DPNE custom panels can be easily designed using any of the following components. Consult your Philips Dynalite dealer for advice.






Mirrored Stainless Steel Gold Plated Stainless Steel

Antique Brass

DPNEClassic Series

User Control Panels


dimensions

88

88

33.60

1.60 16.05

30.25

69.

10

60.33 48.42

DPNEClassic Series

User Control Panels



PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPNE308NDyNet Network SocketButton: NonePlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPNE914On/Off ToggleButton: On/OffPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPNE921On, OffButtons: On, OffPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPNE941PresetButtons: 1-3, OffPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPNE963Preset, Ramp Up, Ramp DownButtons: 1-3, Off, Up, DownPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox


PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPNE982ProgrammingButtons: 1-4, Off, Up, Down, ProgramPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPNE982DProgramming, KeyswitchButtons: 1-4, Up, Down, Off, Program Plate: Panel Enable/DisableH 86mm x W 146mm2 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPNE981DNPreset, Keyswitch, Network SocketButtons: 1-7, OffPlate: Panel Enable/DisableH 86mm x W 146mm2 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPNE9103Preset, Ramp Up, Ramp DownButtons: 1-7, Off, Up, DownPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 146mm2 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox


PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPNE9122ProgrammingButtons: 1-8, Off, Up, Down, ProgramPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 146mm2 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox


ON/OFF

ON

OFF

1

2

3

OFF

1

2

3

OFF

1 5

2 6

3 7

4 OFF

1

2

3

4

OFF

PROGRAM

1

2

3

4

OFF

PROGRAM

ENABLE

DISABLE

PANEL

1 5

2 6

3 7

4 OFF

ENABLE

DISABLE

PANEL

1 5

2 6

3 7

4 8

1 5 9

2 6 10

3 7 11

4 8 OFF

1 5

2 6

3 7

4 8

OFF

PROGRAM

1 5 9

2 6 10

3 7 11

4 8 OFF9

13

14

15




DPNEClassic Series

User Control Panels

panel ordering information In addition to the standard layout codes provided on page 3, the following non-stock items may be ordered using the corresponding catalogue numbers.


DPNE Data Sheet Rev F April 2011


None (Blank) 900-011 900-009 900-005 900-0031 270-046 270-026 - -2 270-053 270-030 - -3 270-054 270-031 - -4 270-055 270-032 - -5 270-056 270-033 - -6 270-057 270-034 - -7 270-058 270-035 - -8 270-059 270-036 - -9 270-060 270-037 - -

10 270-047 270-027 - -11 270-048 - - -12 270-049 - - -13 270-050 - - -14 270-051 - - -15 270-052 - - -

270-075 270-044 270-023 270-017270-067 270-038 270-019 270-013

ON 270-072 270-042 - -OFF 270-071 270-041 270-021 270-015

ON/OFF 270-073 - - -MANUAL 270-068 270-039 - -

DAY 270-066 - - -NIGHT 270-070 - - -

SECURITY 270-074 - - -CLEAN 270-065 - - -

PROGRAM - - 270-022 270-016



alternate finishes

DPNE926 2 Button 2 Room Join Panel DPNE951F4 5 Button Preset 4 Fader PanelDPNE908J 0 Button Panel with 2 Room Join Keyswitch DPNE951F6 5 Button Preset 6 Fader PanelDPNE908J3 0 Button Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch DPNE951F8 5 Button Preset 8 Fader PanelDPNE941F1 4 Button Preset Panel with Single Fader DPNE951F12 5 Button Preset 12 Fader PanelDPNE941D 4 Button Preset Panel with Panel Enable Keyswitch DPNE981D 8 Button Preset with Panel Enable KeyswitchDPNE941N 4 Button Preset Panel with DyNet Socket DPNE981J 8 Button Preset Panel with 2 Room Join KeyswitchDPNE941J 4 Button Preset Panel with 2 Room Join Keyswitch DPNE981J3 8 Button Preset Panel with 3 Room Join KeyswitchDPNE941J3 4 Button Preset Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch DPNE981N 8 Button Preset Panel with DyNet SocketDPNE946 4 Button 3 Room Join Panel DPNE982J 8 Button Program Panel with 2 Room Join KeyswitchDPNE946D 4 Button 3 Room Join Panel with Disable Keyswitch DPNE982J3 8 Button Program Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch

DPNE***-MS Mirrored Stainless Steel FinishDPNE***-GS Gold Plated Stainless Steel FinishDPNE***-BS Coated Solid Brass FinishDPNE***-PC Custom Powdercoat Finish - consult your Philips Dynalite Dealer for advice

DPN-SFClassic Series

User Control Panels

Philips Dynalite DPN-SF series user control panels are a popular choice for commercial and residential applications, providing integrated automation solutions. These robust panels are supplied as standard in a brushed stainless steel finish, with square button caps in silver, black bezel and black engraving. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of button function. Custom design, finish and capability options further enhance the DPN series, offering superior choice and functionality.









technical data

custom panels The Philips Dynalite DPN-SF user control panels are available ex-stock in 13 standard layouts (see overleaf). Occasionally, the specific requirements of a project call for a panel not found within the standard range. Philips Dynalite DPN-SF custom panels can be easily designed using any of the following components. Consult your Philips Dynalite dealer for advice.






Mirrored Stainless Steel

Gold Plated Stainless Steel

Coated Solid Brass


User Control Panels


dimensions

72

115

3

33.60

78.

90

65.

41

14.30 28.50

16.80

83.

65

48.01


User Control Panels



PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPN308N-SFDyNet Network SocketButton: NonePlate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPN914-SFOn/Off ToggleButton: On/OffPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPN921-SFOn, OffButtons: On, OffPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPN941-SFPresetButtons: 1-3, OffPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPN963-SFPreset, Ramp Up, Ramp DownButtons: 1-3, Off, Up, DownPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox


PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPN982-SFProgrammingButtons: 1-4, Off, Up, Down, ProgramPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPN982D-SFProgramming, KeyswitchButtons: 1-4, Up, Down, Off, ProgramPlate: Panel Enable/DisableH 115mm x W 118mm2 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPN981DN-SFPreset, Keyswitch, Network SocketButtons: 1-7, OffPlate: Panel Enable/DisableH 115mm x W 118mm2 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPN9103-SFPreset, Ramp Up, Ramp DownButtons: 1-7, Off, Up, DownPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 118mm2 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox


PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPN9122-SFProgrammingButtons: 1-8, Off, Up, Down, ProgramPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 118mm2 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox


ON/OFF

ON

OFF

1

2

3

OFF

1

2

3

4

1 5

2 6

3 7

4 OFF

1

2

3

4

OFF

PROGRAM

1

2

3

4

ENABLE

DISABLE

OFF

PROGRAM

PANEL

1

2

3

4

ENABLE

DISABLE

PANEL

5

6

7

OFF

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

OFF

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

9

10

11

OFF8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

OFF

OFF

PROGRAM

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

9

10

11

8

13

14

15

OFF12





User Control Panels

panel ordering information In addition to the standard layout codes provided on page 3, the following non-stock items may be ordered using the corresponding catalogue numbers..


DPN-SF Data Sheet Rev D April 2011

DPN926-SF 2 Button 2 Room Join Panel DPN951F4-SF 5 Button Preset 4 Fader PanelDPN908J-SF 0 Button Panel with 2 Room Join Keyswitch DPN951F6-SF 5 Button Preset 6 Fader PanelDPN908J3-SF 0 Button Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch DPN951F8-SF 5 Button Preset 8 Fader PanelDPN941F1-SF 4 Button Preset Panel with Single Fader DPN951F12-SF 5 Button Preset 12 Fader PanelDPN941D-SF 4 Button Preset Panel with Panel Enable Keyswitch DPN981D-SF 8 Button Preset with Panel Enable KeyswitchDPN941N-SF 4 Button Preset Panel with DyNet Socket DPN981J-SF 8 Button Preset Panel with 2 Room Join KeyswitchDPN941J-SF 4 Button Preset Panel with 2 Room Join Keyswitch DPN981J3-SF 8 Button Preset Panel with 3 Room Join KeyswitchDPN941J3-SF 4 Button Preset Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch DPN981N-SF 8 Button Preset Panel with DyNet SocketDPN946-SF 4 Button 3 Room Join Panel DPN982J-SF 8 Button Program Panel with 2 Room Join KeyswitchDPN946D-SF 4 Button 3 Room Join Panel with Disable Keyswitch DPN982J3-SF 8 Button Program Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch


None (Blank) 900-011 900-009 900-005 900-0031 270-046 270-026 - -2 270-053 270-030 - -3 270-054 270-031 - -4 270-055 270-032 - -5 270-056 270-033 - -6 270-057 270-034 - -7 270-058 270-035 - -8 270-059 270-036 - -9 270-060 270-037 - -10 270-047 270-027 - -11 270-048 - - -12 270-049 - - -13 270-050 - - -14 270-051 - - -15 270-052 - - -

270-075 270-044 270-023 270-017270-067 270-038 270-019 270-013

ON 270-072 270-042 - -OFF 270-071 270-041 270-021 270-015

ON/OFF 270-073 - - -MANUAL 270-068 270-039 - -

DAY 270-066 - - -NIGHT 270-070 - - -

SECURITY 270-074 - - -CLEAN 270-065 - - -

PROGRAM - - 270-022 270-016



DPN***-MS Mirrored Stainless Steel FinishDPN***-GS Gold Plated Stainless Steel FinishDPN***-BS Coated Solid Brass FinishDPN***-PC Custom Powdercoat Finish - consult your Philips Dynalite Dealer for advice

alternate finishes

DPNE-SFClassic Series

User Control Panels

Philips Dynalite DPNE-SF series user control panels are a popular choice for commercial and residential applications, providing integrated automation solutions. These robust panels are supplied as standard in a brushed stainless steel finish, with square button caps in silver, black surround and black engraving. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of button function. Custom design, finish and capability options further enhance the DPNE-SF series, offering superior choice and functionality.









technical data

custom panels The Philips Dynalite DPNE-SF user control panels are available ex-stock in 13 standard layouts (see overleaf). Occasionally, the specific requirements of a project call for a panel not found within the standard range. Philips Dynalite DPNE-SF custom panels can be easily designed using any of the following components. Consult your Philips Dynalite dealer for advice.






Mirrored Stainless Steel Gold Plated Stainless Steel

Antique Brass


User Control Panels


dimensions

88

88

3.40

33.60 28.50

14.30

65.

41

59.60

16.

80

48.01


User Control Panels

User requirements can shift over time and necessitate changes to, or additions of, buttons on an existing panel. Buttons, bezels and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated, without the need for any tools or extra wiring.


PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPNE308-SFDyNet Network SocketButton: NonePlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPNE914-SFOn/Off ToggleButton: On/OffPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPNE921-SFOn, OffButtons: On, OffPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPNE941-SFPresetButtons: 1-3, OffPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPNE963-SFPreset, Ramp Up, Ramp DownButtons: 1-3, Off, Up, DownPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox


PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPNE982-SFProgrammingButtons: 1-4, Off, Up, Down, ProgramPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPNE982D-SFProgramming, KeyswitchButtons: 1-4, Up, Down, Off, ProgramPlate: Panel Enable/DisableH 86mm x W 146mm2 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPNE981DN-SFPreset, Keyswitch, Network SocketButtons: 1-7, OffPlate: Panel Enable/DisableH 86mm x W 146mm2 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPNE9103-SFPreset, Ramp Up, Ramp DownButtons: 1-7, Off, Up, DownPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 146mm2 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox


PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox

DPNE9122-SFProgrammingButtons: 1-8, Off, Up, Down,ProgramPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 146mm2 gang

PanelFunction

Engraving

DimensionsWallbox


ON/OFF

ON

OFF

1

2

3

OFF

1

2

3

OFF

1 5

2 6

3 7

4 OFF

1

2

3

4

OFF

PROGRAM

1

2

3

4

OFF

PROGRAM

ENABLE

DISABLE

PANEL

1 5

2 6

3 7

4 OFF

ENABLE

DISABLE

PANEL

1 5

2 6

3 7

4 8

1 5 9

2 6 10

3 7 11

4 8 OFF

1 5

2 6

3 7

4 8

OFF

PROGRAM

1 5 9

2 6 10

3 7 11

4 8 OFF9

13

14

15





User Control Panels

panel ordering information In addition to the standard layout codes provided on page 3, the following non-stock items may be ordered using the corresponding catalogue numbers.


DPNE-SF Data Sheet Rev D April 2011


None (Blank) 900-011 900-009 900-005 900-0031 270-046 270-026 - -2 270-053 270-030 - -3 270-054 270-031 - -4 270-055 270-032 - -5 270-056 270-033 - -6 270-057 270-034 - -7 270-058 270-035 - -8 270-059 270-036 - -9 270-060 270-037 - -

10 270-047 270-027 - -11 270-048 - - -12 270-049 - - -13 270-050 - - -14 270-051 - - -15 270-052 - - -

270-075 270-044 270-023 270-017270-067 270-038 270-019 270-013

ON 270-072 270-042 - -OFF 270-071 270-041 270-021 270-015

ON/OFF 270-073 - - -MANUAL 270-068 270-039 - -

DAY 270-066 - - -NIGHT 270-070 - - -

SECURITY 270-074 - - -CLEAN 270-065 - - -

PROGRAM - - 270-022 270-016



alternate finishes

DPNE926-SF 2 Button 2 Room Join Panel DPNE951F4-SF 5 Button Preset 4 Fader PanelDPNE908J-SF 0 Button Panel with 2 Room Join Keyswitch DPNE951F6-SF 5 Button Preset 6 Fader PanelDPNE908J3-SF 0 Button Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch DPNE951F8-SF 5 Button Preset 8 Fader PanelDPNE941F1-SF 4 Button Preset Panel with Single Fader DPNE951F12-SF 5 Button Preset 12 Fader PanelDPNE941D-SF 4 Button Preset Panel with Panel Enable Keyswitch DPNE981D-SF 8 Button Preset with Panel Enable KeyswitchDPNE941N-SF 4 Button Preset Panel with DyNet Socket DPNE981J-SF 8 Button Preset Panel with 2 Room Join KeyswitchDPNE941J-SF 4 Button Preset Panel with 2 Room Join Keyswitch DPNE981J3-SF 8 Button Preset Panel with 3 Room Join KeyswitchDPNE941J3-SF 4 Button Preset Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch DPNE981N-SF 8 Button Preset Panel with DyNet SocketDPNEF946-SF 4 Button 3 Room Join Panel DPNE982J-SF 8 Button Program Panel with 2 Room Join KeyswitchDPNE946D-SF 4 Button 3 Room Join Panel with Disable Keyswitch DPNE982J3-SF 8 Button Program Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch

DPNE-SF***-MS Mirrored Stainless Steel FinishDPNE-SF***-GS Gold Plated Stainless Steel FinishDPNE-SF***-BS Coated Solid Brass FinishDPNE-SF***-PC Custom Powdercoat Finish - consult your Philips Dynalite Dealer for advice

DLPStandard Series

User Control Panels

Philips Dynalite DLP series user control panels are an aesthetically pleasing, cost-effective method of providing integrated automation in commercial buildings and homes. They are available in two configurations; a single column, which provides for button configurations of one to five buttons and a dual column design for up to ten buttons. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of switch function. The Philips Dynalite DLP series user control panels incorporate a miniature DyNet control network socket, which is accessed by removing the snap-on panel cover, enabling system adjustments and programming to be carried out from any user control panel on the network. Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities have been integrated, eliminating the need for separate sensors where IR remotes are required.

Supply12V DC 20-35mA from the DyNet network


Front Cover FinishesElectric White

Button ColoursElectric white (standard) or charcoal grey.Other colours available upon request

LED IndicatorsBlue

Operating Climate0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing


MaterialsGrid Plate & Rear Cover - ABSPlastic Cover - ABSSwitch Membrane - Silicone


technical data

available finishes The Philips Dynalite DLP user control panels are supplied in electric white. To complement this finish, button caps and bezels are available in white and charcoal grey and a dedicated IR receive switch cap is also available.

standard panel configurations (others available upon request)

1 button 10 buttons7 buttons6 buttons5 buttons2 buttons

DLPStandard Series

User Control Panels

functionality

All Philips Dynalite panels use a network protocol called Dynet to communicate with other network devices. This dedicated lighting control protocol allows panels to communicate directly with each other, lighting load controllers and other integration devices. This network architecture is not dependant on a central processor, so there is no single point of network failure and makes for more efficient commissioning of the system features. Every Philips Dynalite user interface is capable of performing both simple and advanced functions without the need for additional network devices. Each button on the panel has a range of standard control options that can be individually configured to perform features such as toggle lighting on/off, ramp of lighting up/down, changing an area scene and perform virtual room joins. By using these built-in functions end users can take full control of their site. The Philips Dynalite panel range also supports inbuilt tasking which allows the panels to perform multiple complex functions from the press of a single button. A task triggered from a single button press may be used to affect an entire system changing the lighting scenes in many different areas, initiating a “PANIC” mode or perform some more complex function such as requesting information from other devices like a network timer clock, then sending out the required scene for the particular season. Tasks can be programmed into the panels during commissioning of the system that allows the end-user to interact with the lighting control system more intuitively and allows one button press to perform multiple functions for true automation.

dimensions

54

71.9

83.

8

45

99.

5

19.8

34.4 5.9 12.3

14.6

115

.9

DLPStandard Series

User Control Panels


IR receive The Philips Dynalite DLP user control panels incorporate Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities as standard. When IR receive is required, an LSP-SW-IR switch cap must be fitted in button position 5 for single column panels and position 10 for dual column panels.

button caps The button shape offers a generous area for text or symbols, ensuring that the function of each button is clearly discernable from normal viewing distances. Over nineteen standard engraved button caps are available ex-stock. Contact your local Philips Dynalite dealer for details on custom engraving.

mechanics

Charcoal (CH)White (WE) IR Receive (IR)

network access The DyNet control network is easily accessed by removing the snap-on cover and inserting the LSP-PRO network connector into the miniature panel socket, as illustrated below. This enables system adjustments and programming to be carried out from any user control panel on the network.




DLPStandard Series

User Control Panels

panel ordering information Detailed below are catalogue numbers for the standard panel configurations, which are supplied complete with blue LED status indicators, white covers, blank white buttons and white bezels.

Grid Plate Configurable Panel Spare Cover

1 Button DLP910 LSP-COV-01-WE






switchcap ordering information Blank Caps & Bezels Part Number

Cap - White LSP-SW-WE

Bezel - White LSP-BZ-WE

Cap - Charcoal LSP-SW-CH

Bezel - Charcoal LSP-BZ-CH

Cap to suit IR Receive LSP-SW-IR

Engraved Caps

Button Cap Engraving Detail

White Cap Charcoal Grey Cap

1 LSP-SW-WE-1 LSP-SW-CH-1










LSP-SW-WE-UP LSP-SW-CH-Up

LSP-SW-WE-DOWN LSP-SW-CH-DOWN

PROGRAM LSP-SW-WE-PROGRAM LSP-SW-CH-PROGRAM

ON LSP-SW-WE-ON LSP-SW-CH-ON

OFF LSP-SW-WE-OFF LSP-SW-CH-OFF

ON/OFF LSP-SW-WE-ON/OFF LSP-SW-CH-ON/OFF

HIGH LSP-SW-WE-HIGH LSP-SW-CH-HIGH

MED LSP-SW-WE-MED LSP-SW-CH-MED

LOW LSP-SW-WE-LOW LSP-SW-CH-LOW

DLP Data Sheet Rev N April 2011

DLPEStandard Series

User Control Panels

The Philips Dynalite DLPE series user control panels are an aesthetically pleasing, cost-effective method of providingintegrated automation in homes and commercial buildings. They are available in two configurations; a single column,which provides for button configurations of one to five buttons and a dual column design for up to ten buttons. Smoothaction buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving,further assisting the identification of button function. The Philips Dynalite DLPE series user control panels incorporate aminiature DyNet control network socket, which is accessed by removing the snap-on panel cover, enabling systemadjustments and programming to be carried out from any user control panel on the network. Infra-red (IR) receivecapabilities have been integrated, eliminating the need for separate sensors where IR remotes are required.



Front Cover FinishesBrushed Stainless Steel (standard) or Gunmetal. Other material and colour finishes available upon request.

Button ColoursCharcoal grey (standard) or electric white.Other colours available upon request.

LED IndicatorsBlue (standard), Red or Green. Other colours available on request.



MaterialsGrid Plate & Rear Cover - ABSSwitch Membrane - SiliconeMetallic Covers - Anodised Aluminium,Stainless Steel


technical data

available finishes The Philips Dynalite DLPE series user control panels include an extensive designer range of cover, button cap and bezel colour accessories. In addition to the standard Brushed Stainless Steel, covers are available in Gunmetal or other material and colour finishes (on request). To complement these finishes, button caps and bezels are available in white and charcoal grey, providing a wide range of décor matching capabilities. A dedicated IR receive switch cap is also available.



DLPEStandard Series

User Control Panels

dimensions

functionality


34.4

14.5

54

73.

1

73.3 60.3

87.4

87.

4

11.7

19.9 6.1

45

DLPEStandard Series

User Control Panels


IR receive The Philips Dynalite DLPE user control panels incorporate Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities as standard. When IR receive is required, an LSP-SW-IR switch cap must be fitted in button position 5 for single column panels and position 10 for dual column panels.

button caps The button shape offers a generous area for text or symbols, ensuring that the function of each button is clearly discernable from normal viewing distances. Over 19 standard engraved button caps are available ex-stock. Contact your local Philips Dynalite dealer for details on custom engraving.

mechanics

Charcoal (CH) White (WE) IR Receive (IR)





DLPEStandard Series

User Control Panels

panel ordering information Detailed below are catalogue numbers for the standard panel configurations, which are supplied complete with blue LED status indicators, brushed stainless steel covers, charcoal grey buttons and charcoal grey bezels.

Grid Plate Configurable Panel

1 Button DLPE910

2 Button DLPE920

5 Button DLPE950

6 Button DLPE960

7 Button DLPE970

10 Button DLPE9100

snap-on finish accessories ordering information DLPE Metallic Covers

Grid Stainless Steel

1 Button DLPE-01SS

2 Button DLPE-02SS

5 Button DLPE-05SS

6 Button DLPE-06SS

7 Button DLPE-07SS

10 Button DLPE-010SS

Grid Gun metal

1 Button DLPE-01GL

2 Button DLPE-02GL

5 Button DLPE-05GL

6 Button DLPE-06GL

7 Button DLPE-07GL

10 Button DLPE-010GL

Blank Caps & Bezels Part Number






Engraved caps






















DLPE Data Sheet Rev J April 2011

DL2PStandard Series

User Control Panels

Philips Dynalite DL2P series user control panels are an aesthetically pleasing, cost-effective method of providing integrated automation in commercial buildings and homes. They are available in two configurations; a single column, which provides for button configurations of one to five buttons and a dual column design for up to ten buttons. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of switch function. The Philips Dynalite DL2P series user control panels incorporate a miniature DyNet control network socket, which is accessed by removing the snap-on panel cover, enabling system adjustments and programming to be carried out from any user control panel on the network. Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities have been integrated, eliminating the need for separate sensors where IR remotes are required.



Front Cover FinishesElectric White

Button ColoursElectric white (standard) or charcoal grey.Other colours available upon request

LED IndicatorsBlue



MaterialsGrid Plate & Rear Cover - ABSPlastic Cover - ABSSwitch Membrane - Silicone


technical data

available finishes The Philips Dynalite DL2P user control panels are supplied in electric white. To complement this finish, button caps and bezels are available in white and charcoal grey and a dedicated IR receive switch cap is also available.



DL2PStandard Series

User Control Panels

functionality


dimensions

73.7

116

.2

93.

7

34.5 27.8

6.7 4.8 13.9

83.

8

48.6

99.

5

DL2PStandard Series

User Control Panels


IR receive The Philips Dynalite DL2P user control panels incorporate Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities as standard. When IR receive is required, an LSP-SW-IR switch cap must be fitted in button position 5 for single column panels and position 10 for dual column panels.

button caps The button shape offers a generous area for text or symbols, ensuring that the function of each button is clearly discernable from normal viewing distances. Over nineteen standard engraved button caps are available ex-stock. Contact your local Philips Dynalite dealer for details on custom engraving.

mechanics

Charcoal (CH)White (WE) IR Receive (IR)





DL2PStandard Series

User Control Panels


Grid Plate Configurable Panel Spare Cover

1 Button DL2P910 LSP-COV-01-WE






switchcap ordering information Blank Caps & Bezels Part Number






Engraved Caps






















DL2P Data Sheet Rev A April 2011

DPWEStandard Series

User Control Panels

The Philips Dynalite DPWE series user control panels are an aesthetically pleasing, cost-effective method of providing integrated automation in homes and commercial buildings. They are available in two configurations; a single column, which provides for button configurations of one to five buttons and a dual column design for up to ten buttons. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of button function. The Philips Dynalite DPWE series user control panels incorporate a miniature DyNet control network socket, which is accessed by removing the snap-on panel cover, enabling system adjustments and programming to be carried out from any user control panel on the network. Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities have been integrated, eliminating the need for separate sensors where IR remotes are required.



Front Cover FinishesStandard: Brushed Stainless Steel, Polished Brass, Brushed Brass, Antique Bronze, White, Matt Black and Mirrored Stainless Steel. Optional: Satin Silver, Antique Brass, Antique Copper, Antique Silver, Polished Desert Brass, Desert Gold, Light Bronze, Creamy White. Other material and colour finishes available upon request.

Button ColoursCharcoal grey (standard) or electric white.Other colours available upon request.

LED IndicatorsBlue (standard), Red or Green. Other colours available on request. Operating Environment0-50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing


MaterialsGrid Plate & Rear Cover - ABSSwitch Membrane - SiliconeMetallic Covers - Anodised Aluminium,Stainless Steel


technical data

available finishes The Philips Dynalite DPWE series user control panels include an extensive designer range of cover, button cap and bezel colour accessories. Cover finishes include Brushed Stainless Steel, Polished Brass, Brushed Brass, Antique Bronze, White, Matt Black, and Mirrored Stainless. To complement these finishes, button caps and bezels are available in white and charcoal grey, providing a wide range of décor matching capabilities. A dedicated IR receive switch cap is also available.



DPWEStandard Series

User Control Panels

dimensions


86

86

26.30

5.70

12.40 8.10

34.40

60.30

68.

88

63

53.90

63

DPWEStandard Series

User Control Panels


IR receive 9 Series Configurable user control panels incorporate Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities as standard. When IR receive is required an LSP-SW-IR switch cap must be fitted in button position 5 for single column panels and position 10 for dual column panels.

button caps The button shape offers a generous area for text or symbols, ensuring that the function of each button is clearly discernable from normal viewing distances. Over 19 standard engraved button caps are available ex-stock. Contact your local Philips Dynalite dealer for details on custom engraving.

mechanics

Charcoal (CH) White (WE) IR Receive (IR)





DPWEStandard Series

User Control Panels


snap-on finish accessories ordering information For finish combinations, covers, bezels and buttons are supplied separately using the catalogue numbers detailed below.

Caps & Bezels Part Number






Cap Engraving Detail White Cap Charcoal Grey Cap




















DPWE Data Sheet Rev H April 2011

Grid Plate Configurable Panel Panel Options

1 Button

DPWE950

Charcoal Grey Buttons - CHElectric White Buttons - WE

* When options are required, add desired option code suffix(es) to catalogue number eg. DPWE910-GL

2 Button

5 Button

6 Button

DPWE91007 Button

10 Button

Grid BrushedStainless

Polished Brass

Brushed Brass

Antique Bronze

White Matt Black Mirrored Stainless

1 Button DPWE-01SS DPWE-01PB DPWE-01BB DPWE-01AB DPWE-01WE DPWE-01MB DPWE-01MS




7 Button DPWE-07SS DPWE-07PB DPWE-07BB DPWE-07AB DPWE-07WE DPWE-07MB DPWE-07MS10

Button DPWE-10SS DPWE-10PB DPWE-10BB DPWE-10AB DPWE-10WE DPWE-10MB DPWE-10MS

DTP100Colour Touchscreen

The DTP100 is a feature rich colour LCD touchscreen that uses vivid graphics and sophisticated on-screen controlswhich allows the Systems Installer to create visually stunning and easy-to-use pages. Control of various equipmentsuch as lighting, AV, security and HVAC can be easily integrated and controlled from the one location. Objects such aslogos, buttons, faders, floor plans and diagnostic icons can be placed on pages and used to perform simple and complexconditional logic macros. Pages are created using Philips Dynalite’s touchscreen editor. JavaScript is fully supported.

Incorporating an innovative clip-on fascia capability, the DTP100 fascia accommodates practically any flat architecturalsurface medium. That gives you the freedom to choose; stainless steel, stone, glass, laminate, wood, vinyl, ceramic;the options are limitless. Fascia material may be matched with Philips Dynalite’s DR2P Revolution series user control panels for perfect colour coordination.

Full internet connectivity is supported. The DTP100 is powered from the DyNet network so does not require a mains voltage supply.

Supply12V DC @ 400mA from the DyNet network

ScreenViewable Area: 10.9cm (4.3”) diagonal(H 5.38cm x W 9.5cm)Resolution: 480x272 (16:9 screen ratio)Colour Depth: 16bit (65536)Contrast: 300:1 Luminance: 350 cd/m2

Screen Type: TFT LCDViewing Angle: H 75º Vtop 75º Vbottom 55ºBacklight: LED, Dimmable, min 40,000 hr subject to screen saver settingsTouch Overlay: 4 Wire Resistive

User Page ObjectsButtonFaderText boxIconImage import

Operating System & SoftwareWindows CE 6.0Internet Explorer 6Windows Media Player 9 / MP3 support

AudioOn board speakerLine Out via 3.5mm stereo jack

IO Ports1 x RS485 DyNet serial port1 x Mini USB Type B service socket(programming port)1 x Mini USB Type B service socket(keyboard/mouse)1 x RJ45 10/100BaseT ethernet port1 x Reset Switch

Internal ControlsPC time clock with battery backupProgrammable Logic Controller

HardwareCPU: Intel XScale PXA310 624MHzNon Volatile Memory: 512MBVolatile Memory: 128MB



ConstructionConcealed fixings fascia

DimensionsExposed:H 88 mm x W 146mm x D 6mm

WeightPacked weight: 0.9kg

Ordering Information* Stainless Steel (standard): DTP100 Black Glass fascia (option): DTP100-BG White Glass fascia (option): DTP100-WG *Custom facia finishes also available - ask your Philips Dynalite representative.

Wall box Mounting options700-279 Wallbox recess metal700-389 Wallbox recess drywall700-280 Wallbox surface mount

technical data

DTP100-BGblack glass facia shown*





DTP100 Data Sheet Rev F April 2011

dimensions


The DTP170 is a feature rich colour LCD touchscreen that uses vivid graphics and sophisticated on-screen controls which allows the Systems Installer to create visually stunning and easy-to-use pages. Control of various equipment such as lighting, AV, security and HVAC can be easily integrated and controlled from the one location. Objects such as logos, buttons, faders, floor plans and diagnostic icons can be placed on pages and used to perform simple and complex conditional logic macros. Pages are created using Philips Dynalite’s touchscreen editor. JavaScript is fully supported.

Incorporating an innovative clip-on fascia capability, the DTP170 fascia accommodates practically any flat architectural surface medium. That gives you the freedom to choose; stainless steel, stone, glass, laminate, wood, vinyl, ceramic; the options are limitless. Fascia material may be matched with Dynalite’s DR2P Revolution series user control panels for perfect colour coordination.

Full Internet connectivity is supported. The DTP170 is powered from the DyNet network so does not require a mains voltage connection.

Supply12V DC @ 0.6A from the DyNet network

ScreenViewable Area: 178mm (7”) diagonal (W 152mm x H 91mm)Resolution: 800x480 (WVGA / 16:9 ratio)Colour Depth: 65,536 (16bit)Contrast: 300:1 Luminance: 280 cd/m2

Screen Type: TFT LCDView Angle: H 65º Vtop 60º Vbottom 50ºBacklight: LED, Dimmable, 40,000hr lifeTouch Overlay: 4 Wire Resistive

User Page ObjectsButtonFaderText boxIconImage import

Operating System & SoftwareWindows CE 6.0Internet Explorer 6Windows Media Player 9 / MP3 support

AudioOn board speakerLine Out via 3.5mm stereo jack IO Ports1 x RS485 DyNet port - screw terminals1 x RS485 DyNet port - RJ121 x 10/100BaseT Ethernet port RJ451 x USB Type Mini-B socket1 x USB Type A socket1 x Reset switch

technical data Internal ControlsPC time clock with battery backupProgrammable Logic Controller

HardwareIntel XScale PXA310 624MHz, 128MB SDRAM, 512MB FLASH


Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature10% to 90% RH non condensing

ConstructionConcealed fixings facia, metal body & wallbox (wallbox supplied separately)

DimensionsExposed: H 149mm x W 233mm x D 7mm

Hidden, including wallbox: H 136mm x W 220mm x D 70mm

WeightPacked weight: 1.9kg

Ordering Information*Stainless Steel fascia, no wallbox: DTP170Stainless Steel fascia, with wallbox: DTP170-WBWallbox only: DTP170-WALLBOX*Custom fascia finishes also available





DTP170 Data Sheet Rev E April 2011

dimensions (wall box fitted) dimensions (no wall box)

29.10

36.25

233

149

155.28

94.27

100

136

131

220208.40

121.9

0

19.2079

Hole suitable for 6 gauge or M3.5 pan head screw

7077.15

15050

233

149

155.28

94.27

220

136

16595

Ø25.20

Ø22.30

Hole suitable for 6 gauge or M3.5 pan head screw

DTC602 & DTCE602

Timer clock

The DTC602 is an astronomical 365 day timer clock with Sunrise/Sunset tracking, automatic Daylight Saving adjustment and powerful macro and conditional logic functions. The timer clock interfaces with other devices over the DyNet RS485 network to automate tasks and events. It may be used as an energy management controller or simply to select scenes at preset times of the day or week. The DTC602 is powerful enough to provide full automation of a large commercial project and can be programmed with events that automatically run at the specified time. A typical application entails automating lighting levels in a restaurant for breakfast, lunch, dinner, evening entertainment and cleaning. A manual button press can over-ride the pre-programmed events until the next timed event occurs.

In energy management applications, the timer clock sets the operating mode of other devices, such as Philips Dynalite DUS704 sensors, to give priority to either IR, PIR or PE facilities, depending on the time of day or day of week. The DTC602 can be programmed and operated remotely via a PC or via the front panel LCD display and keypad, which incorporates a PIN password to prevent unauthorised adjustment. The DTC602 can be used to make programming changes to a Philips Dynalite system without the use of a computer. The LCD display will help guide the user step by step through the programming task. Information such as channel, area and preset scene names are automatically uploaded from the network to assist in programming. It can be used in conjunction with standard control panels to access preset scenes that are not commonly used or that require protection from accidental selection. The device is available in Aus/US (DTC) & UK/Euro (DTCE) mounting configurations.

Supply 12V DC at 50mA from the DyNet network

Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port

User Controls1 x 122 x 32 pixel rear lit LCD display1 x 12 button LCD transport keys1 x 12 button numeric keypad

Clock365 day clockBattery back upSunrise/Sunset trackingAutomatic daylight saving adjustment250 timed events64 tasks

MemoryAll data stored in 100 year life EEPROM



Construction1.6mm stainless steel faceplate/body

DimensionsDTC602:H 115mm x W 164mm x D 24mm

DTCE602:H 86mm x W 146mm x D 24mm


technical data

DTC602

DTCE602




DTC602 & DTCE602

Timer clock

DTC602 & DTCE602 Data Sheet Rev E April 2011

mounting dimensions DTC602

164mm

36mm 92mm 36mm

115mm

16mm

84mm

16mm

19mm

72mm

24mm

24mm

15mm 15mm134mm

20mm4m

m

mounting dimensions DTCE602

146mm 24mm

13mm

121mm

13mm

6mm

134mm

6mm

9mm

68mm

9mm

20mm4mm

43mm

86mm

DDTC001Timer clock

The DDTC001 is a tamper-resistant DIN rail mounted embedded timer clock. All functions are programmed via a PC and there are no external controls available, preventing disruption to device operation. The DDTC001 features an astronomical 365 day timer clock with Sunrise/Sunset tracking, automatic Daylight Saving adjustment and powerful macro and conditional logic functions. The timer clock interfaces with other devices over the DyNet RS485 network to automate tasks and events and may be used as an energy management controller or simply to select scenes at preset times of the day or week. The DDTC001 is powerful enough to provide full automation of a large commercial project and can be programmed with events that automatically run at the specified time. A typical application entails automating lighting levels in a restaurant for breakfast, lunch, dinner, evening entertainment and cleaning.

The timer clock forms part of a powerful energy management system when used in conjunction with other Philips Dynalite devices. For instance, when used to set the operating mode of the Philips Dynalite DUS704 universal sensors, the timer clock can give priority to Infra-red, PIR or PE capability, depending on the time of day or day of week, ensuring that energy is not used unnecessarily. The DDTC001 is programmed remotely via a PC and will operate autonomously even if the PC is disconnected.

Supply12V DC at 20mA from the DyNetnetwork


User ControlsNo user controls - all functions areprogrammed with a PC

Clock365 day clockBattery back upSunrise/Sunset trackingAutomatic daylight saving adjustment250 timed events8 tasks




ConstructionABS DIN Rail enclosure (2 unit)

DimensionsH 86mm x W 35mm x D 58mm


technical data




DDTC001Timer clock

mounting dimensions

DDTC001 Data Sheet Rev H April 2011

top view

side view

35mm

86

mm

58

mm

end view

to suit 35mm DIN rail

46mm

61mm

49

mm

29

mm

DUS804CMultifunction Sensor

The DUS804C is a low profile recessed flush mount 360º ceiling mount sensor that combines motion detection (PIR), Infra-red remote control reception (IR) and ambient light level detection (PE) in the one device. In applications such as office buildings, lecture theatres and homes, the DUS804C universal sensor can be utilised to detect motion and switch on the lights. When rooms are unoccupied, lights can be automatically dimmed or switched off to provide energy savings. The unit also incorporates a segmented click-up bezel surrounding the motion sensor element. This enables a portion of the sensing field to be readily masked to prevent nuisance detection from adjacent doorways or corridors. The same sensor provides IR control reception to enable full remote control over lights, audio-visual equipment and blinds. A range of hand-held Infra-red transmitters to complement DUS804 series universal sensors are available. In situations where it is critical to maintain precise lighting control for individual workspaces, such as an office workstation or even air traffic control centres, the DUS804C facilitates light compensation. The DUS804C can also be placed in an automatic“Daylight Harvesting” mode for energy savings.

Motion Detector DUS804C:Standard SensitivityMaximum detection range: 5.0mDetection Area: 7.4m x 5.6m rectangular (at a height of 2.5m) Detection speed: 1.0m/sDetection object: 700mm x 250mmDetection zones: 64 LED activation indicator Sensor: Quad element pyro-electric

DUS804C-SM: Slight Motion SensitivityMaximum detection range: 2.0mDetection Area: 5.0m circular (at a height of 2.0m) Detection speed: 0.5m/sDetection object: 200mm x 200mmDetection zones: 104 LED activation indicator Sensor: Quad element pyro-electric

PE CellRange <5 lux to >5000 lux (reflected)Automatic “Daylight Harvesting” mode

Infra Red Remote Control Receiver Range up to 6m LED activation indicator Can be used with DTK500 series Infra red remotes or other learning IR remote controls

Control IO Serial Port – RS485 DyNet

TerminalsStandard:5 way removable terminal strip, 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size

-RJ Option:2 x RJ12 network sockets

Controls Walk test/IR received LED indicatorService Switch

DyNet DC Load 20mA

ConfigurationAll functions remotely programmable



ConstructionABS plastic enclosure

Dimensions72mm diameter x D 26mm


technical data

options Slight motion sensitivity - SM2 x RJ12 Network sockets - RJ

motion detection masking bezel

-RJ version with network sockets




DUS804CMultifunction Sensor

lens pattern - DUS804C

Mounting height 2.5M

DUS804C Data Sheet Rev G April 2011

lens pattern - DUS804C-SM

Mounting height 2.5M

Ø72 mm

26 mm

11 mm

Ø 61 mm

Ø 63 mm

mounting dimensions

DUS804C-UPMultifunction Sensor

The DUS804C-UP is a 360º ceiling surface mounted sensor that combines Ultrasonic (UP) Passive Infra Red (PIR) motion detection, ambient light level detection (PE) and infra red remote control reception (IR) in the one device. In applications such as office buildings, lecture theatres, and homes, the DUS804C-UP universal sensor can be utilised to detect motion with in its scan area to trigger a programed action with the lighting. When the DUS804 has detected a room is unoccupied for a set time, lights can be automatically dimmed or switched off to provide energy savings. The same sensor provides IR control reception to enable full remote control over lights, audio-visual equipment and blinds. A range of hand held infra-red transmitters to complement series of universal sensors are available. In situations where it is critical to maintain precise lighting control for large workspaces such as open office floor plan, the DUS804C facilitates light compensation in an automatic“Daylight Harvesting” mode for energy savings.

technical data Motion Detection PIR:Maximum detection range: 5.0mDetection area: 7.4m x 5.6m ellipse (at a height of 2.5m) Detection speed: 1.0m/sDetection object: 700mm x 500mmDetection zones: 64 LED activation indicator Adjustable Pulse Count & Sensitivity Sensor: Quad element pyro-electric R.F.I. Immunity: >15V/m @ 10-1000MHz

Ultrasonic:Normal motion detection area: 8m x 16m (128m2 coverage)Slight motion detection area:4m x 12m (48m2 coverage)Transducer pairs: 2Operating frequency: 32KHz

PE CellRange <5 lux to >5000 lux (reflected)Automatic “Daylight Harvesting” mode

Infra Red Remote Control Receiver Range >6m LED activation indicator Can be used with DTK500 series infra red remotes or other learning IR remote controls

Control IO Serial Port – RS485 DyNetIR window used as network sign on

Terminals5 way removable terminal strip, 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size

Controls Walk test/IR received LED indicator

DyNet DC Load 80mA





Dimensions90mm diameter x Depth 26mm (exposed)

MountingRecessed spring clip or adjustable surface mounting ring. Sensor shipped with surface mounting ring


DUS804C-UP with surface mounting




Ø 90

17

25

27

Ø 63

9

DUS804C-UPMultifunction Sensor

coverage

mounting dimensions

DUS804-UP Datasheet Rev E April 2011

DUS704Universal Sensors

The DUS704 series sensors combine motion detection (PIR), Infra-red remote control reception (IR) and ambient lightlevel detection (PE) in the one device. In applications such as homes, lecture theatres and office towers, DUS704universal sensors can be utilised to detect motion and switch on the lights. When rooms are unoccupied, lights canbe automatically dimmed or switched off to provide energy savings. The same sensor provides IR control reception toenable full remote control over lights, audio-visual equipment and blinds. A range of hand-held Infra-red transmitters tocomplement DUS704 series universal sensors are available. In situations where it is critical to maintain precise lightingcontrol for individual workspaces, such as a flight control tower or office workstation, the DUS704 facilitates lightcompensation. The DUS704 can also be placed in an automatic “Daylight Harvesting” mode for energy savings.

Motion Detector DUS704C: 360º Ceiling Mount PIR Detector Range 9m x 6m ellipse (at a height of 2.4m) Mounting height: 2.1m to 4.0m, 2.4m optimum LED activation indicator Adjustable Pulse Count & Sensitivity Detection zones: 34 dual element zones Sensor: Dual element pyro-electric R.F.I. Immunity: >15V/m @ 10-1000MHz

DUS704W: Wide Angle Wall Mount PIR DetectorRange 12m x 90º (standard lens)Mounting height: 1.1m to 3.1m LED activation indicator Adjustable Pulse Count & SensitivityDetection zones: 20 dual element zones Sensor: Dual element pyro-electric R.F.I. Immunity: >15V/m @ 10-1000MHz

Optional lens: 30m x 30º Long Range

PE CellDynamic range <5 lux to >13000 luxAutomatic “Daylight Harvesting” modeCan be used for light measurement

Infra Red Remote Control Receiver Range >6m LED activation indicator Can be used with DTK500 series Infra-red remotes or other learning IR remote control

Control IO Serial Port – RS485 DyNet

Terminals5 way terminal strip, 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size and RJ12 socket

Controls Walk test/IR received LED indicatorTamper switch

DyNet DC Load 20mA





DimensionsDUS704C:102mm diameter x D 30mm

DUS704W:H 85mm x W 66mm x D 45mm


technical data

DUS704C

DUS704W

Long Range Lens -LRoptions




DUS704Universal Sensors

lens pattern - DUS704W wide angle

DUS704 Data Sheet Rev G April 2011

lens pattern - DUS704W long range

lens pattern - DUS704C 360º

Mounting height 2.4M12M

12M

DTS900 & DTS900M

Temperature Sensors

The DTS900 measures ambient temperature and provides data to other devices on a DyNet network, such as relay controllers used to switch heating and cooling plants. High and low setpoints are configured using Envision commissioning software, or can be dynamically set via other Philips Dynalite devices, such as the DTK600 touchscreen. Conversely, the touchscreen can also be used to interrogate the DTS900 and to display the current temperature in real time.

The DTS900 incorporates filtering and hysteresis to provide compensation for rapid temperature fluctuations and features an LED indicator which provides the status of the device. The DTS900 is also available with a user-adjustable temperature setpoint knob (DTS900M).

Supply 12V @20mA from the DyNet network


Measurement Range0º to 50ºC, accuracy +/-1ºC

Internal ControlsProgrammable Logic Controller

User Controls• LED indicator Blue = Cool Red = Heat

• Temperature set point knob (DTS900M only)


Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non-condensing

ConstructionABS plastic wall mount case

Dimensions H 71mm x W 71mm x D 26mm

Weight Packed weight 110 grams

technical data

DTS900

DTS900M




DTS900 & DTS900M

Temperature Sensors

electrical diagram DTS900 mounting dimensions

DTS900 & DTS900M Data Sheet Rev E April 2011

71mm

71m

m

Ø60mm

26mm

3mm

+15V

D +

D -

GND

SHIELD

µP

DyNetRS485

T

+15V

D +

D -

GND

SHIELD

µP

DyNetRS485

T

electrical diagram DTS900M

Relay and Multi-use Controllers

As one of the most popular forms of lighting control, relay and multi-use devices can have the most impact to energy management and lighting control. Available in both DIN rail and wall box configuration, Philips Dynalite supports a vast range of relay controllers with a variety of circuit numbers and sizes to work individually or as part of a system, suiting any project requirement. Each device can store over 170 presets, allowing the recall of complex switching logic from simple network messages. As the required preset scenarios are stored within each relay device, the commissioning process and network messages are simplified.

DMRC210Relay Controller

The DMRC210 is designed to allow intelligent, networked control of individual lighting fixtures. The compact design enables the unit to be mounted directly within the gear enclosure of many fixtures. Each relay controller incorporates two relay outputs which can be used to control mains supply to the fixture and to provide an intensity control when used with tapped ballasts. The relays are very robust and are fully rated for difficult lighting loads.

Supply100-240V 50/60Hz Single Phase at20A

Outputs2 x switched output at 10A (inductive)

Switching DeviceRelay, Tungsten pilot contact,16A inductive, 165A surge

Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port

DyNet DC Supply12V @ 150mA (supply for approx. 7 panels)

Preset Scenes170

Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral1 x 4mm2 max conductor size

Output TerminalsLine1, Line2, Neutral1 x 4mm2 max conductor size

Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status


Operating Environment50˚C max

EnclosureABS plastic

DimensionsL 185mm x W 44mm x D 38mm


technical data

All types of Switched loadsload compatibility




DMRC210Relay Controller

electrical diagram mounting dimensions

DMRC210 Data Sheet Rev G April 2011

Supply:100-240V 1 Phase

20A

LN

DyNetRS485

+VED + D -

GN

D

Shie

ld

µP

CH2

CH1

N

225 mm

45 m

m

10 mm

Ø 5 5 m

m

240 mm

211 mm

240 mm

38 m

m

45 mm

DDRC810-GL Relay Controller

The DDRC810-GL controllers are designed to operate any type of switched load. The DDRC810-GL incorporates common supply SPST output relays, suitable for ON/OFF control of all types of mains rated equipment. The device is DIN rail mountable, designed for installation within a switchboard or next to circuit breakers feeding the circuits to be controlled. The devices can operate as stand-alone units or as part of an integrated system when connected to a DyNet network.

Supply100-240V, 50/60Hz Single Phase at max. 20A

OutputsDDRC810-GL – 8 x switched SPST common supply outputs: resistive relay contact TV5 rated16A 250V AC

Maximum Total Box Load20A Box Load

Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port/DMX1 x AUX programmable dry contact input

User ControlsService Over-ride switchDiagnostic LED

Internal ControlsInbuilt Programmable Logic Controller


Preset Scenes170

Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral, Earth2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size

Output TerminalsC, NO, NC for each channel 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size

Diagnostic FunctionsCircuit run time tracking on each channelDevice Online/Offline status



EnclosurePolycarbonate DIN-rail enclosure (12 unit)



technical data

Any switched load, up to 10A per channelload compatibility

Manual Override - MOfront panel override switches, ideal for contactor control applications. Includes:• ON/OFF/AUTO override switch for each channel• LED status indicator for each channel

options




DDRC810-GLRelay Controller

electrical diagram - DDRC810 mounting dimensions

DDRC810-GL Data Sheet Rev J April 2011

Supply:100-240V 1 Phase

20A

DyNetRS485

+VE

AU

X

D + D -

GN

D

Shie

ld

DDRC810Dt-GL Multi-use Relay Controller

the DDRC810Dt-GL controller is designed to operate any type of switched load. the DDRC810Dt-GL incorporates voltage free changeover SPDt type output relays, making the device ideal for controlling bi-directional motors, such as curtain motors. this device is DIN-rail mountable, designed for installation within a switchboard, or next to circuit breakers feeding the circuits to be controlled. this device can operate as stand-alone units or as part of an integrated system when connected to a DyNet network.

Supply100-240V, 50/60Hz Single Phase at max. 0.25 AActive SMPS power consumption estimate is max 8W

OutputsDDRC810Dt-GL – 8 x switched SPDt voltage free changeover maximum ratings for each output:10A 250V AC (resistive), 10A30V DC (resistive)• Snubbers/spark killers not fitted, de rate for reactive loads.• Functional isolation only between switched outputs, do not mix SELV and non-SELV loads on the same DDRC810Dt-GL.

Maximum Total Box Load40A Box Load

Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port / DMX1 x AUX programmable dry contact input

User ControlsService Over-ride switchDiagnostic LED

Internal ControlsInbuilt Programmable Logic Controller


Preset Scenes170

Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral, Earth2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size

Output TerminalsC, NO, NC for each channel 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size

Diagnostic FunctionsCircuit run time tracking on each channel

ComplianceCE, C-tick


EnclosurePolycarbonate DIN-rail enclosure (12 unit)



technical data

Any switched load, up to 10A per channelload compatibility

Manual Override - MOfront panel override switches, ideal for contactor control applications. Includes:• ON/OFF/AUtO override switch for each channel• LED status indicator for each channel

options




DDRC810Dt-GLMulti-use Relay Controller

electrical diagram - DDRC810 mounting dimensions

DDRC810DT-GL Data Sheet Rev J April 2011

S upply:100-240V 0.25A

1 P has e

AN

E

DyNetR S 485

AU

X

+VED

+

D-

GN

D

Sh

ield

NO

NC

NO

NC

NO

NC

NO

NC

NO

NC

NO

NC

NO

NC

NO

NC

C H1

C H2

C H3

C H4

C H5

C H6

C H7

C H8

µP

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DDRC420FRRelay Controller

The DDRC420FR is designed to control any type of switched load. The power circuit is of a “feed through” design and is electrically equivalent to a 4 pole contactor, with the additional advantage of each pole being separately controllable via the DyNet network. The DDRC420FR is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard next to the circuit breakers, feeding the circuits to be controlled. Each channel is fitted with a hardware over-ride switch which is accessible from the front panel. This switch also provides visual indication of the state of each channel. The relays are very robust and are fully rated for difficult lighting loads.

Control Supply100-240V 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.25A

Outputs4 x Switched feed thru outputs at 20A(inductive). Maximum device load 80A

RelaysRated switch current: 50A resistive, 20A lighting loadRated inrush current: 500ARated switching voltage: 440V AC

Supported wiring schemes• Single Phase and Neutral• Three Phase and Neutral (Star)

Control IO1 x DMX512 / RS485 DyNet serial port1 x programmable dry contact AUX input

User ControlsService Over-ride switch for each channelDiagnostic LED



Preset Scenes170

Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral, Earth1 x 4mm2 max conductor size

Output TerminalsLine In, Line Out for each channel1 x 4mm2 max conductor size

Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline statusCircuit run time tracking



ConstructionPolycarbonate DIN rail enclosure (6 unit)



technical data

load compatibility All Types of switched loads up to 20A inductive






DDRC420FR Data Sheet Rev J April 2011

94.5

6946

38

51

75

59

105

ControlSupply:

100-240V 0.25A1 Phase

LNE

DyNetRS485

AU

X+V

E

D + D -

GN

DSh

ield

µP

CH4 - INCH4 - OUT

CH3 - INCH3 - OUT

CH2 - INCH2 - OUT

CH1 - INCH1 - OUT


The DDRC820FR is designed to control any type of switched load. The power circuit is of a “feed through” design and is electrically equivalent to a 8 pole contactor, with the additional advantage of each pole being separately controllable via the DyNet network. The DDRC820FR is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard next to the circuit breakers feeding the circuits to be controlled. Each channel is fitted with a hardware override switch which is accessible from the front panel.


Outputs8 x Switched feed through outputs at 20A(inductive). Maximum device load 160A


Supported wiring schemes• Single Phase and Neutral• Three Phase and Neutral (Star)

Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port1 x programmable dry contact AUX input




Preset Scenes170



Diagnostic FunctionsCircuit run time trackingDevice Online/Offline status






technical data

All Types of switched loads up to 20A inductiveload compatibility






DDRC820FR Data Sheet Rev K April 2011

Supply: 100-240V 0.25A

1 Phase

LNE

DyNetRS485

AUX

+VE

D + D -

GND

Shie

ld

µP

CH8 IN

CH7 IN

CH6 IN

CH5 IN

CH4 IN

CH3 IN

CH2 IN

CH1 IN

CH8 OUT

CH7 OUT

CH6 OUT

CH5 OUT

CH4 OUT

CH3 OUT

CH2 OUT

CH1 OUT

DDRC1220FR-GLRelay Controller

The DDRC1220FR-GL is designed to control any type of switched load. The power circuit is a “feed through” design and is electrically equivalent to a 12 pole contactor, with the additional advantage of each pole being separately controllable via the DyNet network. The DDRC1220FR-GL is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard next to the circuit breakers feeding the circuits to be controlled. Each channel is fitted with a hardware override switch which is accessible from the front panel.


Outputs12 x Switched feed thru outputs at 20A(inductive)


Supported wiring schemes:• Single Phase and Neutral• Three Phase and Neutral (Star)Maximum Device Load 180A

Control Inputs1 x DMX512 / RS485 DyNet serial port1 x programmable dry contact AUX input




Preset Scenes170



Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline statusCircuit run time trackingNetwork Watchdog






technical data

load compatibility Load Type (Max load may be limited by 500A inrush rating)All Types of switched loads up to 20A inductive




DDRC1220FR-GLRelay Controller


DDRC1220FR-GL Data Sheet Rev J April 2011

Supply:100-240V 0.25A

1 Phase

LNE

DyNetRS485

XU

AV

E+

+ D

- D

DN

Gdleih

S

CH12 IN

µP

CH11 IN

CH10 IN

CH9 IN

CH8 IN

CH7 IN

CH6 IN

CH5 IN

CH4 IN

CH3 IN

CH2 IN

CH1 IN

CH12 OUT

CH11 OUT

CH10 OUT

CH9 OUT

CH8 OUT

CH7 OUT

CH6 OUT

CH5 OUT

CH4 OUT

CH3 OUT

CH2 OUT

CH1 OUT

DRC1205Relay Controller

The DRC1205 is a 12 channel relay controller, with a maximum load of 5A per channel. It is used for switching both lighting and non-lighting loads. In areas where it is beneficial to sequentially switch on large lighting loads, such as factories and indoor sporting arenas, the DRC1205 can be programmed to stagger the switch on of the lights, to minimise peak demand current.

Supply 400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase at 20A per phase or230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 60A

Outputs 12 x switched outputs at 5A (total device load is 60A)

Protection3 x 20A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers

Switching DeviceRelay 10A nom. (resistive)

Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port1 x programmable dry contact AUX input

User ControlsService Over-ride switch - All channels to 100% Diagnostic LED

Internal ControlsProgrammable Logic ControllerPhilips Dynalite Accessory Module enabled


Preset Scenes120

Supply TerminalsL1, L2, L3, N1 x 10mm2 max conductor size

Output TerminalsLine, Neutral for each channel2 x 4mm2 max conductor sizeEarth Link bar provided

Cable EntriesMains – 1 x 75mm x 53mm removable gland plateData – 1 x 25mm dia. knockout




ConstructionAlloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish

DimensionsH 450mm x W 225mm x D 75mm (excludes wall brackets)

Weight Packed weight 4.8kg

technical data

All switched loads up to 5Aload compatibility

Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -ACombined MCB and RCD internal protection fitted – RCBO

options




DRC1205Relay Controller


DRC1205 Data Sheet Rev O April 2011

Supply:

230V 20A3 Phase

or230V 60A1 Phase E

DyNetRS485

AUX

+VE

D + D -

GND

SHIE

LD

NL3

µP

L2L1

NCH2

CH1

NCH3

CH4N

N

NCH6

CH5

NCH7

CH8N

N

NCH10

CH9

NCH11

CH12N

N

165 mm

225 mm

500 m

m

480 m

m

450 m

m

80 m

m

75 m

m

DRC810DTRelay Controller

The DRC810DT relay controller is designed for operation of general purpose switched loads in applications where facilities for input connection are also required. Incorporating voltage free change-over SPDT output relays, the DRC810DT is ideal for controlling bi-directional motors, such as those used for curtains. The device is also suitable for connection to third-party systems where a low voltage contact interface is required. Multipurpose programmable dry contact and analogue inputs are also provided for interfacing to other devices. The DRC810DT also incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions.

Supply 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.1A

Switched Outputs 8 x SPDT voltage free changeover contactsmaximum ratings for each output:- NO contact – 10A 250V AC (resistive) 10A 30V DC (resistive) TV8 rated- NC contact – 5A 250V AC (resistive) 5A 30V DC (resistive) * Snubbers/spark killers not fitted, de-rate for reactive loads.* All 8 outputs must be on the same Phase.* Functional isolation only between switched outputs, do not mix SELV and non-SELV loads on the same DRC810DT.

Maximum Total Box Load 80A

Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port / DMX1 x AUX programmable dry contact input8 x multi-purpose programmable dry contact / 0-5V / 0-10V DC analogue inputs

User ControlsService Over-ride switch - All channels to 100%Diagnostic LED



Preset Scenes170


Output TerminalsC, NO, NC for each channel1 x 4mm2

max conductor size Earth link bar provided


Dry Contact Terminals 1 x 1mm2 max conductor size




Construction Alloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish Dimensions H 320mm x W 225mm x D 75mm (excludes wall brackets)


technical data

Any switched load, up to 10A per channelDry contact interface unitsBlind motors

Loads requiring changeover contactsCurtain motors

load compatibility




DRC810DTRelay Controller


DRC810DT Data Sheet Rev J April 2011

CNONCC

NONCC

NONCC

NONCC

NONCC

NONCC

NONCC

NONC

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH5

CH6

CH7

CH8

IN1 A/D

A/D

A/D

A/D

IN2

IN3

IN4

IN5

IN6

IN7

0V

IN8

5V

Dry Contact & Analogue

Inputs

Dry ContactOutputs

Supply:230V 0.1A1 Phase E

DyNetRS485

AUX

+12VD

+D

-

GN

DS

HIEL

D

NL

µP

A/D

A/D

A/D

A/D

DRC1210 & DRC1220GLRelay Controllers

The DRC1210 and DRC1220GL are 12 channel relay controllers, with a maximum load per channel of 10A and 20A respectively. They are used for switching both lighting and non-lighting loads. Both controllers have an optional accessory card for control of electronic dimmable ballasts. In areas where it is beneficial to sequentially switch on large lighting loads, such as factories and indoor sporting arenas, the DRC1210 and DRC1220GL can be programmed to stagger the switch on of the lights, to minimise peak demand current.

Supply DRC1210 - 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 40A, or 400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase at 40A per phaseDRC1220GL - 230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase at 63A per phase

Outputs DRC1210 - 12 x switched outputs at 10A (max device load is 120A)DRC1220GL - 12 x switched outputs at 20A (max device load is 180A)

ProtectionDRC1210 - 12 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakersDRC1220GL - 12 x 20A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers

RelayDRC1210 & DRC1220GL - Relay - 50A 230V AC inductive (5000W lighting load rated)

Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port / DMX1 x programmable dry contact AUX input

User ControlsService Over-ride switch - All channels to 100% Diagnostic LED


Preset Scenes170

Supply TerminalsDRC1210 - L1, L2, L31 x 16mm2 max conductor size DRC1220GL - L1, L2, L31 x 35mm2 max conductor size

Output TerminalsLine for each channel1 x 10mm2 max conductor sizeNeutral Link bar providedEarth Link bar provided

Cable EntryMains – 4 x 25mm dia. knockouts mounted on a 100mm x 50mm removable gland plateData – 1 x 25mm dia. knockoutOutputs - 6 x 25mm






(-RCBO version H 585mm)

Weight10.25kg

technical data

Any switched loadload compatibility

Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -AEarth leakage and overload protection on each channel - RCBO (note larger enclosure)

options




DRC1210 & DRC1220GLRelay Controllers


DRC1210 & DRC1220GL Data Sheet Rev S April 2011

Supply:230V

3 Phase

E

DyNetRS485

AUX+V

E

D +

D -

GN

DSH

IELD

NL3

µP

L2L1

CH2

CH1

CH3

CH4

CH6

CH5

CH7

CH8

CH10

CH9

CH11

CH12

NNN

N

NNN

N

NNN

N

Leading Edge Dimmer Controllers

Leading Edge Dimmer Controllers are ideal for lighting circuits with resistive and inductive properties, including mains voltage incandescent fittings, neon and low voltage lamps with a compatible electronic transformer. Available in both DIN rail and wall box configuration, Philips Dynalite supports a vast range of leading edge dimmer controllers with a variety of circuit numbers and sizes to work individually or part of a system, fitting any project requirement. Standard built-in features of the dimmers include: • power conditioning to protect lamps• over voltage• surge protection• brownout/sag protectionStandard features will increase lamp life, reducing the ongoing running costs.

DDLE802 Leading Edge Dimmer Controller

The DDLE802 is an 8 channel leading edge dimmer with a maximum load per channel of 2 Amps. It is suitable for use with incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent fixtures. It is also highly recommended for use in residential and hotel applications. The DDLE802 features Philips Dynalite’s superior voltage regulation and soft start technologies, which protect low voltage lamps and dramatically increase lamp life.

The front panel of the DDLE802-MO (Manual Over-ride) version includes a rear-lit keypad that provides status indication and local control of individual channels. It also features an LED illuminated service switch for diagnostics and local over-ride. Adjacent to the keypad is a network socket for ease of programming. The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard, optionally next to circuit breakers feeding the circuits to be controlled.

Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 16A

Outputs8 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 2A. Maximum device load is 16A.

ProtectionEach pair of channels protected by a replaceable 6.3A time delay M205 fuse

Regulating DeviceTriac - 20A, 600V, 200A surge

Power Conditioning• Regulated outputs• Over voltage protection• Surge protection• Brownout/Sag protection• Spike protection• Soft start• 16 bit fade resolution (65,536 steps)

Cooling SystemNaturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance

Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet and DMX512 serial port1 x AUX programmable dry contact input

User ControlsServer SwitchLED


Preset Scenes170

Supply Terminals2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor sizeLine, Neutral, Earth

Output TerminalsLine, Neutral for each channel, 2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size




EnclosurePoly Carbonate DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit)



technical data

IncandescentIron core transformersLeading edge electronic transformers

load compatibility

- 120V supply option -120V- 100V supply option -100V- Manuel over-ride -MO

options




DDLE802Leading Edge Dimmer Controller


DDLE802 Data Sheet Rev J April 2011

Supply:230V 16A

1 Phase E

DyNetRS485

AUX

+VE

D + D -

GND

SHIE

LD

NNL

CH2

CH1

µP

T 6.3A M205

N

N

CH4

CH3T 6.3A M205

N

N

CH6

CH5T 6.3A M205

N

N

CH8

CH7T 6.3A M205

N

DLE1203Leading Edge Dimmer Controller

The DLE1203 is a 12 channel leading edge energy management controller with a maximum load per channel of 3A and a total device load of 32A. It is suitable for use with incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent fixtures. It is especially suitable for residential applications. When used with Philips Dynalite’s System Integrator, the lighting control system can be integrated into a total smart home solution including security, HVAC, home theatre, blind control and exterior lighting. The DLE1203 protects low voltage lamps and dramatically increases lamp life, through utilisation of Philips Dynalite’s superior voltage regulation and soft start technologies.


Outputs12 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 3A (total device load is 32A)

Protection2 x 16A 6kA single pole thermal magneticcircuit breakers

Regulating DeviceTriac 600V 40A nom. 400A surge

Power Conditioning• Regulated outputs• Over voltage protection• Surge protection• Brownout/Sag protection• Spike protection• Soft start• 16 bit fade resolution (65536 steps)


Interference SuppressionIron powder toroidal choke


User ControlsService SwitchDiagnostic LED


Preset Scenes170







ConstructionAlloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxyfinish

DimensionsH 450mm x W 225mm x D 75mm(excludes wall brackets)


technical data

IncandescentNeon

Iron core transformersLeading edge electronic transformers

load compatibility

Extra RS485 DyNet / DMX512 port -ACircuit breaker trip reporting -BT

options






DLE1203 Data Sheet Rev I April 2011

Supply:230V 32A1 Phase E

DyNetRS485

AU

X+V

E

D + D -

GN

DSH

IELD

NNL

CH2

CH1

NCH3

CH4N

N

NCH6

CH5

NCH7

CH8N

N

NCH10

CH9

NCH11

CH12N

N

µP

165 mm

225 mm

500m

m

480 m

m

450 m

m

80 m

m

75 m

m


The DLE405 is a 4 channel energy management controller with a maximum load per channel of 5A. It is suitable for use with incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent lighting. Where retail merchandise is on display, the DLE405 protects low voltage lamps and dramatically increases lamp life. This is achieved through Philips Dynalite’s superior voltage regulation and soft start technologies.


Outputs4 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phasecontrol) at 5A



Power Conditioning• Regulated outputs• Over voltage protection• Surge protection• Brownout/Sag protection• Spike protection• Soft start• 16 bit Fader resolution (65536 steps)

Cooling SystemNaturally ventilated, no forced cooling, nomaintenance





Preset Scenes170










technical data

IncandescentNeon


load compatibility

Circuit breaker trip reporting -BTExtra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -A

Earth leakage and overload protection on each channel - RCBO (note larger enclosure)

options






DLE405 Data Sheet Rev O April 2011

Supply:230V 20A1 Phase

N

E

DyNetRS485

AU

X

+VE

D + D -

GN

D

CH1

N

CH2

CH3

CH4

N

N

SHIE

LD

µP

LN

365 m

m

225 mm

165 mm

345 m

m

320 m

m

80 m

m

75 m

m


The DLE1205 is a 12 channel leading edge dimmer with a maximum load per channel of 5A and a total device load of 60A. It is suitable for use with incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent fixtures. The combination of load capacity, sub circuit protection and attractive pricing makes it especially suitable for residential and small commercial applications. When used with the Philips Dynalite range of integration accessories, the lighting control system can be integrated into a total smart home solution including security, HVAC, home theatre, blind control and exterior lighting. The DLE1205 protects low voltage lamps and dramatically increases lamp life. This is achieved through Philips Dynalite’s superior voltage regulation and soft start technologies.

Supply400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase at20A per phaseor230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 60A

Outputs12 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 5A. Total device load is 60A.






Rise Time100μS at 230V


User ControlsService Over-ride Switch/Over-rideDiagnostic LED3 x Phase indicator LEDHardware bypass switches for each channel


Preset Scenes170

Supply TerminalsL1, L2, L31 x 10mm2 max conductor size

Output TerminalsLine for each channel1 x 4mm2 max conductor sizeNeutral Link bar providedEarth Link bar provided

Cable EntryMains: 4 x 25mm dia. knockouts mountedon a 100mm x 50mm removable gland plate6 x 25mm dia. knockouts on the right sideof enclosureData: 1 x 25mm dia. knockout





DimensionsH 626mm x W 255mm x D 176mm(including wall brackets)

WeightPacked weight 14kg

technical data

IncandescentNeon


load compatibility

Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -AThree Pole circuit breakers -3PoleCircuit breaker trip reporting -BT

Earth leakage and overload protection on each channel - RCBOoptions






DLE1205 Data Sheet Rev S April 2011

606 m

m62

6 mm

582 m

m

255 mm221 mm

15 m

m

176 m

m14 m

m14

7 mm

Supply:

400/230V 20A3 Phase:

E

DyNetRS485

AUX+V

E

D +

D -

GN

DSH

IELD

NL3

µP

L2L1

CH2

CH1

CH3

CH4

CH6

CH5

CH7

CH8

CH10

CH9

CH11

CH12

NNN

N

NNN

N

NNN

N

Single phase:400/230V 60A


The DLE410 is a 4 channel energy management controller with a maximum load per channel of 10A. It is suitable for use with incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent light sources. In applications where there can be numerous users, such as lecture theatres, the DLE410 can be configured with control panels and an IR Receiver to provide preset scenes for entry, set-up, cleaning and presentations. An over-ride capability for presenters can be provided using Philips Dynalite’s IR handset.


Outputs4 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phasecontrol) at 10A








User ControlsService Over-ride switch - All channels to 100%Diagnostic LEDHardware bypass switches for each channel


Preset Scenes170



Cable EntriesMains – 7 x 25mm dia. knockoutsData – 1 x 25mm dia. knockout







technical data

IncandescentNeon


load compatibility

Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -ACircuit breaker trip reporting -BT

Earth leakage and overload protection on each channel -RCBO

options






DLE410 Data Sheet Rev P April 2011

S upply:230V 40A1 P has e

N

E

DyNetR S 485

AU

X

+VED + D -

GN

D

C H1

N

C H2

C H3

C H4

N

N

µP

N

L

Sh

ield

DLE1210GLLeading Edge Dimmer Controller

The DLE1210GL is a 12 channel leading edge dimmer with a maximum load per channel of 10A and a total device load of 75A. It is suitable for control of large loads, including incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent light sources. The DLE1210GL is the ideal choice in applications requiring reliability combined with large power handling. It is DMX512 compatible, making it perfect for use in theatres, shopping centres and auditoriums. The DLE1210GL protects low voltage lamps and dramatically increases lamp life. This is achieved through Philips Dynalite’s superior voltage regulation and soft start technologies.

Supply400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-phase at25A per phaseor230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 75A

Outputs12 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 10A. Total device load is 75A.








User ControlsService Switch Over-rideDiagnostic LED3 x Phase indicator LEDsHardware bypass switches for each channel


Preset Scenes170

Supply TerminalsL1, L2, L31 x 16mm2 max conductor size

Output TerminalsLine output for each channel1 x 4mm2 max conductor sizeNeutral Link bar providedEarth Link bar provided

Cable EntryMains: 4 x 25mm dia. knockouts mountedon a 100mm x 50mm removable gland plate6 x 25mm dia. knockouts on the right sideof enclosureData: 1 x 25mm dia. knockout





DimensionsH 626mm x W 255mm x D 176mm(including wall brackets)


technical data

IncandescentNeonIron core transformers

Leading edge dimmable electronictransformers

load compatibility

Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -ACircuit breaker trip reporting -BTThree Pole circuit breakers -3Pole

Earth leakage and overload protection oneach channel - RCBOoptions




DLE1210GLLeading Edge Dimmer Controller


DLE1210GL Data Sheet Rev G April 2011

Supply:3 Phase:

230 @ 25ASingle Phase:

230 @ 75AN

L1 CH1

NL2

CH2

CH3

N

CH4

N

CH5

CH6

N

N

L3

E

N

CH7

N

CH8

CH9

N

CH10

N

CH11

CH12

N

N

N

RS485DyNet

AU

X

+VE

D + D -

GN

D

SHIE

LD

µP


The DLE1210 is a 12 channel energy management controller with a maximum load per channel of 10A. It is suitable for control of large loads, including incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent light sources. The DLE1210 is the ideal choice in applications requiring reliability combined with large power handling capability. It is DMX512 compatible, making it perfect for use in theatres and auditoriums.

Supply400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase at40A per phase

Outputs12 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 10A, total box load is 120A max.

Protection12 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers on each channel






Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port1 x programmable AUX dry contact input

User ControlsService/Override SwitchDiagnostic LED3 x Phase indicator LEDsHardware bypass switches for each channel


Preset Scenes170

Supply TerminalsLine1, Line2, Line31 x 16mm2 max conductor sizeEarth Link bar providedNeutral Link bar provided

Output TerminalsLine for each channel1 x 16mm2 max conductor sizeEarth Link bar providedNeutral Link bar provided

Cable EntriesMains - 4 x 25mm dia. knockouts on a 105mm x 145mm removable gland plateData - 1 x 25mm dia. knockout







technical data

IncandescentNeon

Leading edge electronic transformersIron core transformers

load compatibility

Second RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -AEarth leakage and overload protection on each channel -RCBO

Circuit breaker trip reporting -BTThree Pole circuit breakers -3Pole

options






DLE1210 Data Sheet Rev K April 2011

Supply:230V 40A 3 Phase N

L1 CH1

NL2

CH2

CH3

N

CH4

N

CH5

CH6

N

N

L3

E

N

CH7

N

CH8

CH9

N

CH10

N

CH11

CH12

N

N

N

RS485DyNet

AU

X

+VE

D + D -

GN

D

SHIE

LD

µP6

40

mm

20

4m

m

18

7m

m

345mm

265mm

62

0m

m

DLE120-SLeading Edge Dimmer Controller

The DLE120-S is a single channel energy management controller with a maximum load of 20A. It is suitable for the control of large loads including incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent light sources. The DLE120- S is designed for applications where lamp life is critical, such as where lamp maintenance is difficult or expensive. It complements Philips Dynalite’s multi-channel dimmers by providing an extra channel when additional load capacity is required.


Outputs1 x dimmed output (leading edge phase control) at 20A,

ProtectionNo internal protection, supply from a 20A circuit breaker.

Regulating DeviceDual SCR’s 800V 65A nom. 800A surge





Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port8 x dry contact/0-5V/0-10V analogue1 x AUX programmable dry contact input

User ControlsService/Override SwitchDiagnostic LED


Preset Scenes170


Output TerminalsLine, Neutral2 x 4mm2 max conductor sizeEarth Link bar provided

Cable EntriesMains - 1 x 75mm x 53mm removable gland plateData - 1 x 25mm dia. knockout

Dry Contact Terminal1 x 1mm2 max conductor size







technical data

IncandescentNeon


load compatibility

Second R5485 DyNet/ - A DMX512 partoptions






DLE120-S Data Sheet Rev G April 2011

CH1

N


E

N

L

DyNetRS485

AU

X

+VE

D + D -

GN

D

SHIE

LD

µP

0V

5V

365m

m

225 mm

165 mm

345m

m

320m

m

80mm

75mm


The DLE220-S is a 2 channel energy management controller with a maximum load of 20A per channel. It is suitable for control of large loads, including incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent light sources. The DLE220-S is designed for applications where lamp life is critical, such as where lamp maintenance is difficult or expensive. It complements Philips Dynalite’s multi-channel dimmers by providing extra channels when additional load capacity is required. It is DMX512 compatible, making it perfect for use in theatres and auditoriums.


Outputs2 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 20A, total box load is 40A max


Regulating DeviceDual SCRs - 800V 65A nom. 800A surge






User ControlsService/Override SwitchDiagnostic LEDHardware Over-ride switch on each channel


Preset Scenes170

Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral 1 x 16mm2 max conductor sizeEarth link bar


Cable EntriesMains - 3 x 25mm dia. knockouts Data - 1 x 25mm dia. knockouts




ConstructionAluminium/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish



technical data

IncandescentNeon


load compatibility

Second RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -ACircuit breaker trip reporting -BT

Earth leakage and override protection on each channel -RCBO

options






DLE220-S Data Sheet Rev E April 2011


DyNetRS485

AU

X

+VE

D + D -

GN

D

CH1

N

CH2

N

µP

NL

Shie

ld

176 mm

mm

mm

1 mm

1

mm

1

mm17

mm

176

m

m

DLE1220GL-SLeading Edge Dimmer Controller

The DLE1220GL-S is a 12 channel energy management controller with a maximum load per channel of 20A. It is suitable for control of large loads, including incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent light sources. The DLE1220GL-S is the ideal choice in applications requiring reliability combined with large power handling capability. It is DMX512 compatible, making it perfect for use in theatres and auditoriums.

Supply400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase at 63A per phase

Outputs12 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 20A, total box load is 180A max.


Regulating DeviceDual SCRs - 800V 65A nom. 800A surge






User ControlsService/Override SwitchDiagnostic LED3 x Phase indicator LEDsHardware Over-ride switch on each channel


Preset Scenes170

Supply TerminalsLine1, Line2, Line31 x 35mm2 max conductor sizeEarth Link bar providedNeutral Link bar provided

Output TerminalsLine for each channel1 x 16mm2 max conductor sizeEarth Link bar providedNeutral Link bar provided

Cable EntriesMains - 5 x 25mm dia. knockouts on a 105mm x 145mm removable gland plateData - 1 x 25mm dia. knockout

Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline statusChannel override switches






technical data

IncandescentNeon


load compatibility

Second RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -ACircuit breaker trip reporting -BTThree Pole circuit breakers -3Pole

Earth leakage and overload protection on each channel -RCBOoptions




DLE1220GL-SLeading Edge Dimmer Controller


DLE1220GL-S Data Sheet Rev J April 2011

640m

m20

4mm

187m

m

345mm

265mm

620m

m


L1 CH1

NL2

CH2

CH3

N

CH4

N

CH5

CH6

N

N

L3

E

N

CH7

N

CH8

CH9

N

CH10

N

CH11

CH12

N

N

N

RS485DyNet

AU

X

+VE

D + D -

GN

D

SHIE

LD

µP

Trailing Edge Dimmer Controllers

Compatible with main voltage incandescent fittings and low voltage electronic transformers, the Philips Dynalite range of trailing edge dimmer units bring together the very best in lighting control technology. All units support a three phase supply making them ideal for track-lighting dimming applications. Utilising trailing edge dimming techniques can achieve the quietest style of dimming for projects where noise is critical. This makes trailing edge dimmers the perfect choice for art galleries, museums, music hall and lecture rooms. Built-in power conditioning to protect lamps from over voltage, surge protection, brownout/sag protection increases lamp life, reducing ongoing project maintenance costs.

DTE310Trailing Edge Dimmer Controller

The DTE310 is a 3 channel energy management controller with a maximum load per channel of 10A. It has a trailing edge output, making it suitable for use with most types of dimmable electronic transformers. The DTE310 can operate from a three phase or single phase supply, and is especially suited for controlling track mounted fixtures on three circuit track. Using a three phase supply when the DTE310 is connected to three circuit track allows the track to be loaded to it’s maximum rating. Philips Dynalite’s superior voltage regulation and soft start technologies protect lamps, dramatically extending their life. Multi-purpose programmable dry contact and analogue inputs are provided for interfacing to other systems such as AV controllers. The device also incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and macro functions.

Supply 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 30A or 230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase at 10A

Outputs3 x dimmed outputs (trailing edge phase control) at 10A each

Protection3 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakersInternal inductive load detectionOver voltage / current detection

Regulating DevicesDual MOSFET’s - 47A, 650V, 141A surge



Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port1 x AUX programmable dry contact input8 x multi-purpose programmable dry contact/0-5V/0-10V DC analogue inputs

User ControlsService Over-ride switch - All channels to 100%Diagnostic LEDHardware bypass switch for each channel

Internal ControlsProgrammable Logic Controller DyNet DC Supply12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 10 panels)

Preset Scenes170


Supply TerminalsL1, L2, L3, N.1 x 16mm2 max conductor size

Output TerminalsL, N, for each channel1 x 16mm2 max conductor size

Earth link bar provided

Dry Contact Terminal1 x 1mm2 max conductor size



Construction Alloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish Dimensions H 450mm x W 225mm x D 75mm (excludes wall brackets)


technical data

Trailing edge electronic transformersIncandescent lamps

Leading edge electronic transformersTrack lighting

load compatibility

Earth leakage and overload protection on each channel - RCBO

Second RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -AThree Pole isolators -3Pole

options






DTE310 Data Sheet Rev H April 2011

165 mm225 mm

500 m

m

480 m

m

450 m

m

80 m

m

75 m

m


L1

NE

CH1

N

CH2

CH3

N

N

L2L3

DyNetRS485

AU

X+V

E

D +

D -

GN

DS

HIEL

D


The DTE1210 is a 12 channel energy management controller with a maximum load per channel of 10A. It has a trailingedge output, making it suitable for use with most types of dimmable electronic transformers. The DTE1210 can operatefrom a three phase or single phase supply, and is especially suited for controlling track mounted fixtures on three circuittrack. Using a three phase supply when the DTE1210 is connected to three circuit track allows the track to be loaded to it’s maximum rating. Philips Dynalite’s superior voltage regulation and soft start technologies protect lamps, dramatically extending their life. The power circuit for each channel is contained within plug in modules for ease of maintenance. The device incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process complex conditional and sequential logic and macro functions. It is DMX512 compatible, making it perfect for use in theatres and auditoriums.

Supply 400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase at 40A per phase

Outputs 12 x dimmed outputs (trailing edge phase control) at 10A, total box load is 120A max.

Protection12 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers on each channelInternal inductive load detectionOver voltage / current detection

Regulating DeviceDual MOSFET’s - 47A, 650V, 141A surge

Power Conditioning • Regulated outputs• Over voltage protection• Surge protection • Brownout/Sag protection• Spike protection• Soft start• 16 bit fade resolution (65536 steps) Cooling SystemNaturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance

Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port1 x programmable AUX dry contact input

User ControlsService Over-ride switch - All channels to 100% Diagnostic LED 3 x Phase indicator LEDs

Hardware bypass switch for each channel


Preset Scenes170

Supply TerminalsLine1, Line2, Line3, Neutral1 x 16mm2 max conductor size Earth Link bar provided


Cable EntriesMains - 4 x 25mm2 knockouts on a 133mm x 44mm removable gland plateData - 1 x 25mm2 dia. knockout






Weight Packed weight 16.7kg

technical data

Trailing edge electronic transformersIncandescent lamps

Leading edge electronic transformersTrack lighting

load compatibility

Three pole isolators -3POLESecond RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -A

Earth leakage and overload protection on each channel - RCBO

options






DTE1210 Data Sheet Rev F April 2011


L1 CH1

NL2

CH2

CH3

N

CH4

N

CH5

CH6

N

N

L3

E

N

CH7

N

CH8

CH9

N

CH10

N

CH11

CH12

N

N

N

AUX+V

E

D +

D -

GN

DS

HIEL

D

µP

DyNetRS485

Signal Dimmer Controllers

The Philips Dynalite range of Signal Dimmer Controllers, have been engineered to meet the future demands of projects. They are capable of transmitting all industry standard ballast signals (1-10V, DSI, DALI and Broadcast DALI) and support installation opportunities of both DIN rail and wall box, to allow for flexible install opportunities. The Signal Dimmer Controller range also support a vast range of ballast controllers with a variety of circuit numbers and sizes to work individually or as part of a system, suiting any project requirement.

DDBC516FR Dimmer Controller

The DDBC516FR is designed to provide cost effective control of DALI high frequency fluorescent ballasts. Each of the five control outputs support DALI broadcast, DALI Addressed, 1-10V and DSI protocols. The control signals can be programmed to operate in tandem with the five internal switched outputs, which will automatically isolate the power circuit when all associated channels are at 0%. This feature is useful for energy savings applications, as DALI ballasts draw a significant amount of power when the lamps are turned off via a DALI command. The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard next to the circuit breakers supplying power to the controlled lighting circuits. The DDBC516FR contains an integral DALI bus power supply, removing the need for an additional external device.

Control Circuit Supply100-240V 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.5A

Control Outputs5 x Control Outputs, each selectable to;- DALI broadcast: max 10 DALI loads/ch- DALI addressed: max 10 DALI loads/ch- 1-10V: max 10mA Sink or Source/ch- DSI: max 5 DSI loads/ch

Mains Outputs5 x 16 Amp feed thru switched circuits for ballast mains supply

Control Inputs1 x RS485 DyNet serial port1 x AUX programmable dry contact input

Bus Power SupplyInternal DALI bus power supply

User ControlsOver-ride switch for each switched channelOn/Off status indicator for each switched outputService SwitchDiagnostic LED

DyNet DC Supply12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 5 panel)

Preset Scenes170

Diagnostic FunctionsLamp failure reportingBallast failure reportingBallast run time tracking for each ballast and the switched outputDevice Online/Offline status


Output Terminals5 x Ballast power circuit - Line In, Line out1 x 4mm2 max conductor size5 x Ballast control circuit - Dx, Dx1 x 4mm2 max conductor size

Operating Environment0˚ to 40˚C ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non-condensing


EnclosurePolycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (12 units wide)



technical data

DALI, DSI and 1-10V HF ballastsDALI, DSI and 1-10V transformers

DALI, DSI and 1-10V LED driversDALI, DSI and 1-10V Relay Modules

load compatibility




DDBC516FRDimmer Controller


DDBC516FR Data Sheet Rev B April 2011

E

N

L CH1 Out

CH1 In

CH2 Out

CH2 In

CH3 Out

CH3 In

CH4 Out

CH4 In

1-10V/DSI/DALI

Ballast DA 1

Ballast DA 1

1-10V/DSI/DALI

Ballast DA 2

Ballast DA 2

1-10V/DSI/DALI

Ballast DA 3

Ballast DA 3

1-10V/DSI/DALI

Ballast DA 4

Ballast DA 4

1-10V/DSI/DALI

Ballast DA 5

Ballast DA 5

Supply:100-240V50/60Hz1 Phase

Shield

Gnd

D-

D+

+12V

AUX

RS485DyNet

CH5 Out

CH5 In

DBC905Dimmer Controller

The Philips Dynalite DBC905 high frequency fluorescent dimmer controller is designed for direct installation within ceiling cavities. Each control output support DALI broadcast, DALI Addressed, 1-10V and DSI protocols. For ease of installation and maintenance the device incorporates structured wiring connectors, which enables the unit to be readily connected without the use of tools. The DBC905 can be readily integrated with a Building Management System (BMS) via the DyNet control network, making it ideally suited to commercial office installations where a cost effective control solution is required. The device design provides easy connection without the use of tools and is available for three popular wiring brands; CMS Electracom (Modular Wiring) - DBC905C, Wieland - DBC905W and Wago - DBC905MA.

technical data

load compatibility DALI, DSI and 1-10V HF ballastsDALI, DSI and 1-10V transformersDALI, DSI and 1-10V LED driversSwitched loads

DBC905W


Outputs1 x Maintained NC switched output at 5A resistive (not in WA)9 x Switched outputs, each rated at 5A resistive, 2A electronic ballast, 100A surge (max load per block of 3 channels is 5A)

Protection3 x 6.3A replaceable HRC fusesFuse 1 feeds Channels 1, 2, 3 (max load allowed for sum of Channels 1, 2, 3 is 5A)Fuse 2 feeds Channels 4, 5, 6 (max load allowed for sum of Channels 4, 5, 6 is 5A)Fuse 3 feeds Channels 7, 8, 9, Maintained switched output (max load allowed for sum of Channels 7, 8, 9, MO is 5A)

Control Outputs9 x Control Outputs, each selectable to; - DALI broadcast: max 5 DALI loads per ch.- DALI addressed: max 5 DALI loads per ch.- 1-10V: max 10mA Sink or Source per ch.- DSI: max 5 DSI loads per ch.

Control IOLocal DyNet RS485:- 1 x RS485 DyNet Serial Port / DMX- 1 x AUX programmable dry contact input- 4 x RJ12 DyNet connections for multifunction sensors (motion, PE illuminance, and IR receive), user panels and other interface devices. Recommended total devices per RJ12 socket - 5, up to max. of 10. Max. total devices for all sockets - 20Floor DyNet RS485:- 1 x RS485 DyNet Serial Port (functionally isolated from mains)

Control Inputs4 x voltage free single pole double throw (SPDT) switch inputs, momentary or latch User ControlsService Over-ride Switch - all channels to 100%Diagnostic LED

DyNet DC Supply12V @ 400mA

Preset Scenes170

Diagnostic Functions*Lamp FailureBallast failureCircuit run time tracking/lamp life Automated battery tests Device Online/Offline status* DLight, DTK600 Touchscreen or BAS interface is required for analysing diagnostic data. The availability of some diagnostics is dependent on the ballast type.



Enclosure Moulded ABS



Example DALI Ballast Limit CalculationsDALI ballasts with 15A startup inrush: 5 per channel. In this example the number of ballasts is limited by the control output limit of 5 DALI loads.

DALI ballasts with 40A startup inrush: 2 per channel. In this example the number of ballasts is limited by the switched circuit rating of 100A surge.

options Increased capacity - 165A surge switched outputs, 10 DALI loads per channel -HD


output connector pole assignments

connector order codes

Switch Input & Floor Network Terminals5 x 3 pole removable terminal sockets Compatible screw terminal connectors:Wieland: Standard version: Type: Wiecon 8113 Wieland Order No.: 25.320.3353.0 (box of 100)Strain relieved version: Type: Wiecon 8113 Wieland Order No: 25.320.8353.0 (Box of 100)Phoenix:Standard version: Type: Combicon MSTB 2.5/3-ST Order No.: 1754465Strain relieved version: Type: Combicon MSTB 2,5/3-STZ-5,08 Pheonix Order No:1776168 (box of 50) PTR:Standard version: PTR Order No:AK950/3-5.0-GREEN Strain relieved version: PTR Order No: AK950/3L-5.0-GREEN

3 pole removable terminal socket6 pole removable terminal socket

StandardStandard Strain RelievedStrain Relieved

Local DyNet Terminals4 x RJ12 and 6 pole removable terminal socketCompatible screw terminal connectorsWieland:Standard version: Type: Wiecon 8113 Wieland Order No: 25.320.3653.0 (box of 50)Strain relieved version: Type: Wiecon 8113 Wieland Order No: 25.320.8653.0 (box of 50)Phoenix Contact:Standard version: Type: Combicon MSTB 2,5/6-ST Pheonix Order No: 1754520 (box of 50)PTR:Standard version: PTR Order No: AK950/6-5-0-GREENStrain relieved version: PTR Order No: AK950/6L-5.0-GREEN

Supply and Output ConnectorsPlease refer to Wieland, CMS or Wago Electracom for details on applicable connector and cable assemblies.

L E N M 0 + DA DB

DBC905W Output Connector Pole Assignments

L E N M 0 + DA DB

DBC905C Output Connector Pole Assignments


electrical diagram

µP

Supply:23

16 Amp

0V 1 Phase E

NL

AUX

+VE

D +

D -

GND

SHIELD

LocalDyNetRS485

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH5

CH6

CH7

CH8

CH9

Control Output

Connectors

Sensor 1

Sensor 2

Sensor 3

Sensor 4

Switch 1

Switch 2

Switch 3

Switch 4

1-10V/DSI/DALI

1-10V/DSI/DALI

1-10V/DSI/DALI

1-10V/DSI/DALI

1-10V/DSI/DALI

1-10V/DSI/DALI

1-10V/DSI/DALI

1-10V/DSI/DALI

1-10V/DSI/DALI

ReplaceableFuses

T 6.3A H

D +

D -

GNDFloorDyNetRS485





mounting dimensions


DBC905 Data Sheet Rev K April 2011

DDBC120FR-DALI Dimmer Controller

The DDBC120FR-DALIis designed for cost-effective control of DALI high frequency fluorescent ballasts, providing a full universe of 64 DALI channels. Direct DALI to DyNet mapping means that the DALI-imposed limits, such as the maximum of 16 groups, are seamlessly overcome. The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard next to the circuit breaker that is supplying power to the controlled lighting circuit. The DDBC120FR-DALIcontains an integral DALI bus power supply, removing the need for the provision of a separate external supply.

technical data

DALI high frequency fluorescent ballastsDALI electronic low-voltage transformersDALI LED fixtures

Philips Dynalite DALI UI devicesload compatibility

Supply100 -240V 50/60Hz Single Phase at 20A

Control Outputs1 x DALI control output, supporting one full DALI universe of 64 channels, including backward channel

Mains Outputs1 x 20A feed thru switched circuits for DALI ballast mains supply.

DALI Bus Power SupplyInbuilt 15V max 250mA (64 Ballast & 10 user interfaces)

DALI Insulation SystemBasic


User ControlsService Over-ride Switch Diagnostic LED


Preset Scenes170

Diagnostic FunctionsLamp failure reportingBallast failure reportingBallast run time tracking for each ballastDevice Online/Offline status


Output Terminals1 x DALI Ballast circuit: DA-, DA+1 x 4mm2 max conductor size1 x Ballast power circuit = Line in, Line out, Loop1 x 4mm2 max conductor size



EnclosurePolycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (6 unit)

DimensionsH 94.5mm x W 105mm x D 75mm





DDBC120FR-DALIDimmer Controller


DDBC120FR-DALIData Sheet Rev K April 2011

94.5

6946

38

51

75

59

105


The DDBC300-DALI is designed for cost-effective control of DALI high frequency fluorescent ballasts, providing 3 full DALI universes comprising 192 DALI channels. Direct DALI to DyNet mapping means that the DALI-imposed limits, such as the maximum of 16 groups, are seamlessly overcome. The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard next to the circuit breaker that is supplying power to the controlled lighting circuit. The DDBC300-DALI contains an integral DALI bus power supply, removing the need for an additional external device.

Supply100-240V 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.5A

Control Outputs3 x DALI Control Outputs, each supporting a full DALI universe of 64 channels (192 total), including backward channel

DALI Bus Power SupplyInternal 15V rated 128mA per universe


User ControlsService Over-ride SwitchDiagnostic LED


Preset Scenes170

Diagnostic FunctionsLamp failure reportingBallast failure reportingBallast run time tracking for each ballastDevice Online/Offline status


Output Terminals3 x DALI Ballast circuits: DA-, DA+1 x 4mm2 max conductor size






technical data


load compatibility




DDBC300-DALIDimmer Controller


DDBC300-DALI Data Sheet Rev F April 2011

Supply:100-240V 0.5A

1 Phase

E

DyNetRS485

AU

X+V

E

D+

D-

GN

DS

HIE

LD

N

LµP

DALIDALI 1DALI 1

DALI 2DALI 2

DALI 3DALI 3

DALI

DALI


The DDBC320-DALI is designed to provide cost effective control of DALI high frequency fluorescent ballasts. It has three DALI outputs, allowing it to control up to 192 DALI devices. The DALI control signals can be programmed to operate in tandem with the three internal switched outputs, which will automatically isolate the power circuit when all associated DALI channels are at 0%. This feature is useful for energy savings applications, as DALI ballasts draw a significant amount of power when the lamps are turned off via a DALI command. Direct DALI to DyNet mapping means that the DALI imposed limits, such as the maximum of 16 groups, are seamlessly overcome. The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard next to the circuit breakers supplying power to the controlled lighting circuits. The DDBC320-DALI contains an integral DALI bus power supply, removing the need for an additional external device.


Control Outputs3 x DALI Control Outputs, each supporting a full DALI universe of 64 channels (192 total), including backward channel

DALI Bus Power SupplyInternal 15V rated 128mA per universe

Mains Outputs3 x 20 Amp feed thru switched circuits for DALI ballast mains supply


User ControlsService Over-ride SwitchDiagnostic LED


Preset Scenes170

Diagnostic FunctionsLamp failure reportingBallast failure reportingBallast run time tracking for each ballast and the switched outputDevice Online/Offline status


Output Terminals3 x Ballast power circuit - Line In, Line out, Loop, Loop, Loop1 x 4mm2 max conductor size3 x DALI Ballast circuits - DA-, DA+1 x 4mm2 max conductor size






technical data


load compatibility




DDBC320-DALIDimmer Controller


DDBC320-DALI Data Sheet Rev K April 2011

Supply:100-240V 0.5A1 Phase

E

DyNetRS485

AU

X+V

E

D+

D -

GN

DS

HIE

LD

N Out

NL

CH1 Out

DALIDALI 1DALI 1

CH1 In

N In

N Out

CH2 Out

DALIDALI 2DALI 2

CH2 In

N In

N Out

CH3 Out

DALIDALI 3DALI 3

CH3 In

N In

DMBC110Signal Dimmer & Relay Controller

The DMBC110 is designed to allow intelligent, networked control of individual lighting fixtures. The compact designenables the unit to be mounted directly within the gear enclosure of many fixtures. Each dimmer controller incorporates arelay output which can be used to control mains supply to the fixture and a HF ballast control output which can providedimming control of DALI, 1-10V and DSI compatible ballasts and transformers. The relay is very robust and fully ratedfor difficult lighting loads.

Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at10A

Switched Output1 x relay output at 10A (inductive)

Control Output1 x output selectable to:DALI Broadcast, 1-10V, DSI

Control Output CapacityDALI Ballasts and transformers: 50-10V: 10mA source or 20mA sinkDSI Ballasts and transformers: 15

Switching DeviceRelay, Tungsten pilot contact,16A resistive, 165A surge


Preset Scenes170

Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status

DyNet Supply12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels)

Supply TerminalsLine In, Neutral1 x 4mm2 max conductor size

Output TerminalsMains:Line Out, Neutral1 x 4mm2 max conductor size

Control:B1, B21 x 1.5mm2 max conductor size




DimensionsL 185mm x W 4mm x D 38mm

WeightPacked weight 0.19Kg

technical data

DALI, DSI and 1-10V HF BallastsDALI, DSI and 1-10V transformers

All types of Switched loadsload compatibility




DMBC110Signal Dimmer & Relay Controller


DMBC110 Data Sheet Rev F April 2011

Supply:230V

1 Phase10A

LN

DyNetRS485

+VE

D + D -

GN

D

Shie

ld

µP

CH1

B1B21-10V / DSI /

DALI


The DBC410 is designed for use with electronic dimmable fluorescent ballasts, either 1-10V or DSI. It has 4 heavy duty 10A relay outputs to switch fluorescent lighting or other loads in a DyNet energy management system. Four control outputs, selectable to 1-10V DC and DSI, are provided for control of HF ballasts. These control outputs can operate in tandem with or separately from the switched outputs.


Mains Outputs4 x switched outputs at 10A

Control Outputs4 x 1-10V DC or DSI outputsDSI Mode: 100 DSI ballasts per channel1-10V mode: 50mA sink, 50mA source per channel

Overload Protection4 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magneticcircuit breakers

Switching DeviceRelay 16A nom. (resistive) 165A surge




Preset Scenes170


Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral1 x 10mm2 max conductor sizeEarth Link bar provided


V/DSI, +V/DSI for each channel1 x 2mm2 max conductor size







technical data

Switched loadsDSI high frequency fluorescent ballasts

DSI low voltage transformers1-10V high frequency fluorescent ballasts

load compatibility

Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -AEarth leakage and overload protection on each channel -RCBO

Circuit breaker trip reporting -BToptions







DyNetRS485

AUX

+VE

D +

D -

GN

DSH

IELD

NNL

CH2

CH1

NCH3

CH4N

N

0CH6

CH5

0CH7

CH80

0

1-10V / DSI

µP

1-10V / DSI

1-10V / DSI

1-10V / DSI

320m

m

345m

m

365m

m

80m

m

75m

m

225mm

165mm

DBC410 Data Sheet Rev R April 2011


The DBC1205 is designed for use with electronic dimmable fluorescent ballasts, either 1-10V or DSI. It has 12 x 5A relay outputs to switch fluorescent lighting or other loads in a DyNet energy management system. Twelve control outputs, selectable to 1-10V DC and DSI, are provided for control of HF ballasts.

Supply400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase Y at20A per phaseor230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 60A

Outputs12 x switched outputs at 5A12 x HF ballast control outputs, selectable to 1-10V DC and DSI


Switching deviceRelay 10A nom. (resistive)




Preset Scenes170


Supply TerminalsL1, L2, L3, N1 x 10mm2 max conductor size


IV/DSI, +V/DSI for each channel1 x 2mm2 max conductor size







technical data

Switched loadsDSI high frequency fluorescent ballasts

DSI low voltage transformers1-10V high frequency fluorescent ballasts

load compatibility

Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -AThree pole circuit breakers -3POLE

Circuit breaker trip reporting -BToptions






165 mm

225 mm

500

mm

480

mm

450

mm

80 m

m

75 m

m

DBC1205 Data Sheet Rev April 2011

S upply:

230V 20A3 P has e

or

230V 60A1 P has e

EN

L 3L 2L 1

NC H2

C H1

NC H3

C H4N

N

NC H6

C H5

NC H7

C H8N

N

NC H10

C H9

NC H11

C H12N

N

0C H2

C H1

0C H3

C H40

0

1-10V / DSI

0C H6

C H5

0C H7

C H80

0

DyNetR S 485

A UX

+VE

D +

D -

G ND

S HIE L D

µP

0C H10

C H9

0C H11

C H120

0

1-10V / DSI

1-10V / DSI

1-10V / DSI

1-10V / DSI

1-10V / DSI

1-10V / DSI

1-10V / DSI

1-10V / DSI

1-10V / DSI

1-10V / DSI

1-10V / DSI

DDBC1200Dimmer Controller

The DDBC1200 is designed to provide cost effective control of high frequency fluorescent ballasts and dimmable transformers. Each DDBC1200 has 12 independent output channels, each selectable to DALI Broadcast, 0-10V or DSI. When in 0-10V output mode, the device is suitable for interfacing to equipment with an analogue input port such as air dampers. The device can also be linked to a separate relay module for control of 1-10V HF fluorescent ballasts. LED indicators reflect the status of each channel. The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed on a switchboard next to the circuit breaker that is supplying power to the controlled lighting circuit.

Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.5A

Outputs12 x control outputs, selectable to DALI 0-10V or DSI

Output CapacityDALI Broadcast Mode:80 DALI ballasts per channel, 500 total 0-10V mode:50mA sink, source per channel DSI Mode:100 DSI ballasts per channel, 1200 total




Preset Scenes170



Output TerminalsC, CH, for each channel 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size

Operating Environment0° to 50°C ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing





technical data

DSI high frequency fluorescent ballastsDSI electronic low voltage transformers DALI high frequency fluorescent ballasts broadcast mode onlyDALI electronic low voltage transformers broadcast mode only

1-10V high frequency fluorescent ballasts Devices that require 0-10V analogue control signs

load compatibility

Manual Override -MOControl panel on front cover

options




DDBC1200Dimmer Controller


DBC410 Data Sheet Rev N April 2011

S upply:230V 0.5A1 Phas e E

NL

0C H2

C H1

0C H3

C H40

0

0C H6

C H5

0C H7

C H80

0

0C H10

C H9

0C H11

C H120

0

AUX

+VE

D +

D -

GND

S HIE L D

µP

DALI 1-10V DSI

DALI 1-10V DSI

DALI 1-10V DSI

DALI 1-10V DSI

DALI 1-10V DSI

DALI 1-10V DSI

DALI 1-10V DSI

DALI 1-10V DSI

DALI 1-10V DSI

DALI 1-10V DSI

DALI 1-10V DSI

DALI 1-10V DSI

DyNetRS485

DBC1210 &DBC1220GL

Dimmer Controllers

The DBC1210 & DBC1220GL are designed for use with DALI, 1-10V and DSI electronic dimmable fluorescent ballasts and transformers. They have 12 x 10A and 12 x 20A relay outputs respectively, to switch fluorescent lighting or other loads in a DyNet energy management system. Twelve control outputs, selectable to DALI Broadcast, 1-10V and DSI are provided for control of HF ballasts.

SupplyDBC1210 - 400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz3-Phase at 40A per phaseDBC1220GL - 400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz3-Phase at 63A per phase

Switched OutputsDBC1210 - 12 x switched outputs at 10A (total device load is 120A)DBC1220GL - 12 x switched outputs at20A (total device load is 180A)

Control Outputs- DALI Broadcast mode: 64 ballast per channel, up to a maximum of 400- 1-10V mode: 50mA sink/source per channel- DSI mode: 100 ballast per channel, up to a maximum of 1200

Overload ProtectionDBC1210 - 12 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakersDBC1220GL - 12 x 20A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers

Switching DeviceDBC1210 & DBC1220GL - Relay - 50A230V AC inductive (5000W lighting load rated)




Preset Scenes170


Supply TerminalsDBC1210 - L1, L2, L31 x 16mm2 max conductor sizeDBC1220GL - L1, L2, L31 x 35mm2 max conductor sizeNeutral Link bar providedEarth Link bar provided

Output TerminalsLine for each channel1 x 10mm2 max conductor sizeNeutral Link bar providedEarth Link bar providedV/DSI/DALI, +V/DSI/DALI for each channel1 x 4mm2 max conductor size

Cable EntriesMains - 4 x 25mm dia. knockouts mounted on a 88mm x 88mm removable gland plateData - 1 x 25mm dia. knockoutOutput - 6 x 25mm dia knockouts on side of chassis




DimensionsH 457mm x W 252mm x D 126mm(-RCBO version H 585mm)


technical data

DALI fluorescent ballasts broadcast mode onlyDALI low voltage transformers1-10V fluorescent ballasts

DSI fluorescent ballastsDSI low voltage transformersSwitched loads

load compatibility

Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -AEarth leakage and overload protection on each channel - RCBO (Note: larger enclosure)

Three pole circuit breakers -3POLECircuit breaker trip reporting -BToptions




DBC1210 & DBC1220GL

Dimmer Controllers


DBC1210 & DBC1220GL Data Sheet Rev R April 2011

1-10V / DSI

Supply:230V

3 Phase

ENL3L2L1

CH2

CH1

CH3

CH4

CH6

CH5

CH7

CH8

CH10

CH9

CH11

CH12

COMM2

1

COMM3

4COMM

COMM

1-10V / DSI / DALI

COMM6

5

COMM7

8COMM

COMM

COMM10

9

COMM11

12COMM

COMM

N NNNNNNNNNNN

AUX+VE

D +D -

GNDSHIELD

µP

1-10V / DSI / DALI

1-10V / DSI / DALI

1-10V / DSI / DALI

1-10V / DSI / DALI

1-10V / DSI / DALI

1-10V / DSI / DALI

1-10V / DSI / DALI

1-10V / DSI / DALI

1-10V / DSI / DALI

1-10V / DSI / DALI

1-10V / DSI / DALI

DyNetRS485

LED PWM Controllers

Capable of directly driving LED fittings, the Philips Dynalite LED dimmers use Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) technology to great effect. Perfectly suited to Red, Green, Blue (RGB) colour changing applications, chase sequencing or provision of elegant scene settings. The Philips Dynalite LED drivers come in a range of configurations to meet the compatibility requirements of many of the available LED fittings.

Each device is ready to receive native DMX allowing them to be used in colour mixing or chase sequence applications.

DDLEDC60035 PWM Controller

The DDLEDC60035 is designed to control LED loads in decorative architectural lighting applications where creative colour mixing and sequencing is required. The controller provides six pulse width modulated common anode current mode outputs suitable for directly driving 350mA nominal current rated high intensity LED sources. Incorporating internal current regulation the controller is designed to directly operate series connected LED arrays without the need for any additional circuit devices. The device is supplied with a DIN rail mountable housing, designed for installation within a switchboard or suitable electrical enclosure. The DDLEDC60035 is DMX512 compatible and is suitable for the high chase speeds found in display lighting.

SupplyRegulated 18-32VDC 2.5A

LED Outputs6 x 350mA current mode, common anodeMinimum internal voltage drop 0.5VOutputs are short circuit protectedIntegral self resetting thermal overloadprotection

Maximum Power Dissipation6 Watts combined total for consecutivepairs of channels (Ch 1&2, Ch 3&4, Ch5&6). 4 Watts per individual channel.18 Watts Box TotalPd = (Vs - (Vdf x n)) x 0.35Pd = Power dissipation per channelVs = Supply voltageVdf = Diode forward voltagen = Number of diodes in series per channel

Maximum Supply VoltageVs max = 8.5 + (n x Vled) or 32VDC,whichever is the lesserVs max = Maximum supply voltagen = Number of diodes in series per channelVled = LED forward voltage

Minimum Supply VoltageVs min = 4 + (n x Vled) or 18VDC,whichever is the greaterVs min = Minimum supply voltagen = Number of diodes in series per channelVled = LED forward voltage


User ControlsService switchDiagnostic LED


Preset Scenes170

Supply TerminalsPositive, Negative, Earth1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size

Output TerminalsCH, COM for each channel1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size







technical data

350mA Current Mode Common Anode LED fixtures

load compatibility






DDLEDC60035 Data Sheet Rev I April 2011

CH4

COM

DyNet/DMX512RS485

AU

X

+VE

D + D -

GN

D

Shie

ld

Supply:18-32VDC

2.5A

+-E

µP

CH3

COM

CH2

COM

CH1

COM

CH5

COM

CH6

COM

top view

side view

end view


209mm

66m

m

100mm

86m

m

47mm

60mm36

mm

48m

m


The DDLEDC401 is designed to control four channel (RGBW) LED loads in decorative architectural lighting applications where creative colour mixing and sequencing is required. The controller provides four pulse width modulated voltage mode outputs suitable for driving high intensity LED sources. Controller nominal output voltage is 24VDC and can optionally be ordered as 12V output. The device is available in two output configurations to accommodate common anode (DDLEDC401-CA) or common cathode (DDLEDC401-CK) loads. The device is supplied with a DIN rail mountable housing, designed for installation installed within a switchboard or suitable electrical enlosure. The DDLEDC401 is DMX512 compatible and is suitable for the high chase speeds found in display lighting.

Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 130 watts

LED Outputs4 x 1A (nominal) voltage modeMaximum per channel load 1AMaximum total box load 4AOutputs are short circuit protected12V output optionally available (-12V)

DDLEDC401-CAOutput - 24V common anode

DDLEDC401-CKOutput - 24V common cathode

Maximum Total Box Load100 Watts at 24V output50 Watts at 12V output (-12V version)




Preset Scenes96

Supply TerminalsPhase, Neutral, Earth1 x 4mm2 max conductor size








technical data

Voltage mode LED fixturesload compatibility

120V input -IN120 12V output -OUT12

options






DDLEDC401 Data Sheet Rev J April 2011

CH4

COM

DyNet/DMX512RS485

AU

X

+VE

D + D -

GN

D

Shie

ld


ANE

µP

CH3

COM

CH2

COM

CH1

COM

top view

side view

end view


209mm

66m

m

100mm

86m

m

47mm

60mm36

mm

48m

m

DDLEDC605-GLPWM Controller

The DDLEDC605-GL is designed to control LED loads in decorative architectural lighting applications where creative colour mixing and sequencing is required. The controller provides six pulse width modulated common anode voltage mode outputs suitable for directly driving high intensity LED sources. The controller is designed for connection to an external DC power supply enabling the unit to deliver a range of nominal output voltages. The device is supplied with a DIN rail mountable housing, designed for installation within a switchboard or suitable electrical enclosure. The DDLEDC605-GL is DMX512 compatible and is suitable for the high chase speeds commonly found in display lighting.

SupplyExternal 20A regulated power supplyController supply voltage range is 10-24VDC.

LED Outputs6 x 5A voltage mode, common anodeNominal output voltage is equal to the supply voltage, less internal voltage drop of max 0.5VOutputs are short circuit protected with integral self-resetting thermal overload protection

Maximum Total Box Load20A

Control Inputs1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port



Preset Scenes170

Supply TerminalsPositive, Negative, Earth1 x 4mm2 max conductor size





ConstructionPolycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (6 unit)



technical data

Voltage Mode Common Anode LED fixtures

load compatibility




DDLEDC605-GLPWM Controller


DDLEDC605-GL Data Sheet Rev H April 2011

CH4

COM

DyNet/DMX512RS485

AUX

+VE

D + D -

GND

Shie

ld

Supply:10-24VDC

20A

+-E

µP

CH3

COM

CH2

COM

CH1

COM

CH5

COM

CH6

COM

94.5

6946

38

51

75

59

105

Multipurpose Controllers

Within any project many different lighting load types are required to achieve a desired result. Different lighting load types may require a different style of control. The Philips Dynalite range of multipurpose controllers allows customisation of the output types via different output module units.

When using the DIN rail multipurpose controllers, a control type choice for each circuit can be made from relay, leading edge dimmer, trailing edge dimmer, ballast control, fan control and blind/screen control. In any combination, multiple load types can be controlled from a single device.

The wall box multipurpose controller combines leading edge dimming, ballast control, and relay switching into one device. With 10A sized channels this device is perfectly suited as a standalone device for lecture theatres, board rooms and meeting rooms or working with other load controllers as part of a larger system.

DDMC802 Multipurpose Modular Controller

The DDMC802 is an 8 channel controller with a maximum load per channel of 2A. A variety of output modules are available to suit different types of loads and the DDMC802 can accept up to eight plug in modules, which by their removable design also facilitate ease of servicing. Available module types include:• Trailing edge phase control dimmer, suitable for use with most types of dimmable electronic transformers.• Leading edge phase control dimmer, suitable for incandescent lamps and some types of dimmable electronic transformers.• HF Ballast controller, suitable for controlling 1-10V and digital ballasts and transformers (a relay module should be paired with the HF ballast module when controlling 1-10V ballasts).• Relay module, suitable for most types of switched loads.• Fan control module.• Curtain control module.The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard, optionally next to circuit breakers feeding the circuits to be controlled.


Output Options8 x output slots at 2A each. Maximum device load 16A. A derating factor may need to be applied if installed in a smaller sealed switchboard when using Leading or Trailing edge modules, see Instruction Manual for details. Some modules occupy 2 slots. Available modules include:DDBM100 - 1 Channel; 1-10V or digital HF Ballast control. Occupies 1 slotDDCM102 - 1 Channel x 2A SPDT Curtain Control. Occupies 2 slotsDDFM102 - 1 Channel 400VA Fan Control. Occupies 2 slotsDDLM102 - 1 Channel x 2A Leading edge dimmer. Regulating Device - Triac - 20A, 600V. Occupies 1 slotDDLM104 - 1 Channel x 4A Leading edge dimmer. Regulating Device - Triac - 20A, 600V. Occupies 2 slotsDDRM104 - 1 Channel x 4A relay.Switching device - Relay, 16A/250V TV5 100A surge. Occupies 1 slotDDTM102 - 1 Channel x 2A Trailing edge dimmer. Regulating Device - Dual MOSFET’s 22A, 500V, 88A surge. Occupies 1 slot

Dimmer Module Power Conditioning• Regulated outputs• Over voltage protection• Surge protection• Brownout/Sag protection• Spike protection• Soft start• 16 bit fade resolution (65,536 steps)

Front Panel Controls (-MO version)Channel Over-ride switches Channel status indicators Service SwitchService LED

technical data

Digital and 1-10V HF BallastsDigital and 1-10V transformersIncandescent lampsMagnetic transformers

Leading edge electronic transformersSwitched loadsTrailing edge electronic transformers

load compatibility

Manual Over-ride and Status indicators -MOoptions

Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet and DMX512 serial port1 x AUX programmable dry contact input


Preset Scenes170


Diagnostic FunctionsCircuit run time tracking on each channel Device Online/Offline status

Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral, Earth2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size

Output TerminalsLine, Neutral for each channel,2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size






Leading EdgeTrailing Edge

RelayHF Ballast

Curtain Fan




DDMC802 Multipurpose Modular Controller


DDMC802 Data Sheet Rev N April 2011


L

CH1N

NE

Output Card 1 Slot

DyNetRS485

AU

X

+VE

D + D -

GN

D

Shie

ld

µP

CH2N

Output Card 2 Slot

CH3N

Output Card 3 Slot

CH4N

Output Card 4 Slot

CH5N

Output Card 5 Slot

CH6N

Output Card 6 Slot

CH7N

Output Card 7 Slot

CH8N

Output Card 8 Slot

T 6.3A M205

T 6.3A M205

T 6.3A M205

T 6.3A M205

T 6.3A M205

T 6.3A M205

T 6.3A M205

T 6.3A M205

Module DDRM1041 x 4 Amp Switched

Module DDBM1001-10V, DSI, Digital

HF Ballast Controller

1-10V DSI Digital

Module DDLM102 1 x 2AModule DDLM104 1 x 4ALeading Edge Dimmer

Module DDTM102 1 x 2ATrailing Edge Dimmer

Module DDCM102Curtain Controller

CH A

CH B

OFF

HI

MED

LO

Module DDFM102Fan Controller

module electrical diagrams

DDMC802GL Multipurpose Modular Controller

The DDMC802GL is an 8 channel controller with a nominal load per channel of 2A. A variety of output modules are available to suit different types of loads and the DDMC802GL can accept up to four plug in modules, which by their removable design also facilitate ease of servicing. Available module types include:• Trailing edge phase control dimmer, suitable for use with most types of dimmable electronic transformers.• Leading edge phase control dimmer, suitable for incandescent lamps and some types of dimmable electronic transformers.• HF Ballast controller, suitable for controlling DALI Broadcast, 1-10V and DSI ballasts and transformers.• Relay module, suitable for most types of switched loads.• Fan control module.• Curtain control module.The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard, optionally next to circuit breakers feeding the circuits to be controlled.

Supply100-240 50/60Hz Single Phase at max. 16A

Output Options4 x 2 channel output slots at 2A nominal per channel. Maximum device load is 10A. A derating factor may need to be applied if installed in a smaller sealed switchboard when using Leading or Trailing edge modules, see Instruction Manual for details. Some modules occupy 2 slots. Available modules include:DGBM200 - 2 Channel DALI Broadcast, 1-10V, DSI HF Ballast control. Occupies 1 slotDGCM102 - 1 Channel x 2A SPDT Curtain Control. Occupies 1 slotDGFM102 - 1 Channel 400VA Fan Control. Occupies 1 slotDGLM402 - 4 Channel x 2A Leading edge dimmer. Max. module total load 5A. Regulating Device - Triac - 20A, 600V. Occupies 2 slotsDGLM105 - 1 Channel x 5A Leading edge dimmer. Regulating Device - Triac - 20A, 600V. Occupies 2 slotsDGRM204 - 2 Channel x 4A relay.Switching device - Relay, 16A TV5 100A surge. Occupies 1 slotDGTM402 - 4 Channel x 2A Trailing edge dimmer. Max. module total load 5A. Regulating Device - MOSFET’s 25A, 500V, 62A surge. Occupies 2 slotsDGTM105 - 1 Channel x 5A Trailing edge dimmer. Regulating Device - MOSFET’s 25A, 500V, 62A surge. Occupies 2 slots

Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet & DMX512 serial port8 x Programmable dry contact inputs


Preset Scenes170




Output TerminalsChannel, Common for each channel,2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor sizeDry contact input terminals1 x 10 pole removable terminal socketPTR item code: AK950/10-5-0-GREEN






technical data

DSI high frequency fluorescent ballastsDSI electronic low voltage transformers1-10V high frequency fluorescent ballasts

Devices that require 0-10V analogue control signals

load compatibility




DDMC802GL Multipurpose Modular Controller


DDMC802GL Data Sheet Rev F April 2011


L

CH1N

NE

Output Card 1 Slot

µP

CH2NCH3NOutput Card 2 Slot



CH8N

T 6.3A M205

T 6.3A M205

T 6.3A M205

T 6.3A M205

DyNetRS485

AUX

+VE

D +

D -

GND

Shield

module electrical diagrams

DDLE6RC202Leading Edge/Relay

Multipurpose Controller

The DDLE6RC202 is an eight channel controller with six leading edge dimming outputs and two switched outputs with a maximum load per channel of 2 Amps. It is suitable for use with incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent fixtures, and any small switched load. It is also highly recommended for use in residential and hotel applications. The DDLE6RC202 features Philips Dynalite’s superior voltage regulation and soft start technologies, which protect low voltage lamps and dramatically increase lamp life.

The front panel of the DDLE6RC202-MO (Manual Over-ride) version includes a rear lit keypad that provides status indication and local control of individual channels. It also features an LED illuminated service switch for diagnostics and local override. Adjacent to the keypad is a network socket for ease of programming.

The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard, optionally next to circuit breakers feeding the circuits to be controlled.

Supply230V 50/60Hz single phase & neutral at 16A

Outputs6 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 2A. 2 x switched outputs at 2AMaximum device load is 16A. A derating factor may need to be applied if installed in a smaller sealed switchboard, see Instruction Manual for details

Overload ProtectionEach pair of channels protected by a replaceable 6.3A time delay M205 fuse

Regulating DeviceTriac - 20A, 600V.

Switching DeviceRelay - 10A

Power Conditioning• Regulated outputs• Over voltage protection• Surge protection • Brownout/Sag protection• Spike protection• Soft start• 16 bit fade resolution (65,535 steps)

Front Panel Controls (-MO version)Channel Over-ride switchesChannel Status indicatorsService SwitchService LEDRS485 DyNet port

Control Inputs1 x RS485 DyNet and DMX512 serial port1 x AUX programmable dry contact input

DyNet DC Supply120mA

Preset Scenes170



Output TerminalsLine, Neutral for each channel, 2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size



Enclosure ABS DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit)



technical data

IncandescentIron core transformers

Leading edge electronic transformersSwitched loads

Manual Over-ride -MO

load compatibility

options




DDLE6RC202Leading Edge/Relay



DDLE6RC202 Data Sheet Rev B April 2011

93mm

150mm

211mm

75mm

46mm69mm

38mm51

mm75mm

DMC810GLLeading Edge/Signal Dimmer


The DMC810GL multipurpose controller offers control of both incandescent lamps and electronic dimmable and switched ballasts and transformers. Four 10A circuit breakers protect 8 channels rated at 10A each for control of dimmable loads. Four control outputs, selectable to 1-10V DC, DSI and DALI broadcast, are provided for control of HF ballasts. These control outputs can operate in tandem with or separately from, the switched outputs. The ability to control mixed load types from the one controller provides savings on initial capital costs, as well as installation.

Supply 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 40A

Outputs 4 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 10A each4 x switched outputs at 10A 4 x HF ballast control outputs, selectable to 1-10V DC, DSI and DALITotal box load is 40ATotal switched load is 40A orTotal dimmed load is 40A

Overload Protection4 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers


Switching DeviceRelay 16A nom. (165A surge)


Rise Time100µS at 230V





Preset Scenes170


Output TerminalsLine, Neutral for each channels 1-82 x 4mm2 max conductor sizeEarth Link bar provided0V/DSI/DALI, +V/DSI/DALI for channels 9-121 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size

Cable EntriesMains – 8 x 25mm dia knockoutData – 1 x 25mm dia. knockout




ConstructionAlloy/Steel wall mount case with powder coat finish



technical data

IncandescentNeonSwitched loadsDSI high frequency fluorescent ballasts

1-10V DC high frequency fluorescent Leading edge electronic transformersIron core transformers

load compatibility

Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -A Earth leaking and overload protection on each channel -RCBO

options




DMC810GLLeading Edge/Signal Dimmer



DMC810GL Data Sheet Rev C April 2011

176212

412

392

366

179

149

15


N

NL

CH7

CH3

NCH8

CH4N

N

0CH10

CH9

0CH11

CH120

01-10V / DSI / DALI

NCH5

CH1

NCH6

CH2N

N

DyNetRS485

AUX

+VE

D + D -

GND

SHIE

LD

µP

1-10V / DSI / DALI

1-10V / DSI / DALI

1-10V / DSI / DALI

Integration Devices

Within any modern project, many third-party systems can be found performing different roles. Each separate system may use a different protocol for communication. To unite the efforts of these different systems, Philips Dynalite has developed a range of gateway devices that can be used to synchronise their functions together into one integrated system solution. By utilising the correct gateway, different systems can be integrated together allowing end-users to have access to a fully automated site from one interface. By successfully integrating third-party systems with Philips Dynalite, repetitive interaction from end-users is reduced. A range of different gateways have been developed to provide different integration opportunities and network management options.

DNG100BTEthernet Gateway

The Philips Dynalite DNG100BT provides cost effective integration between Philips Dynalite control systems and Ethernet networks. It is designed to provide remote control of sites and link multiple sites together, using the Internet or a corporate LAN as a backbone. The device supports the TCP/IP protocol, with static or DHCP assigned IP addressing. Routing Mode links multiple DNG100BT’s together in point to point or broadcast modes. An integral webserver allows Browser based control scenarios.The interface incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions. The DNG100BT is capable of routing DyNet to third-party systems, such as audio-visual and building automation systems, providing an integrated approach to total building control and energy management.

Supply230V ± 14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.1A

DyNet DC Supply12V DC @ 90mA (supply for approx. 4 panels)

Serial Ports1 x RS485 DyNet serial port1 x 10/100BaseT Ethernet port

Supported Ethernet ProtocolsTCP/IP (TCP & UDP)HTTPFTPTelnetEncryption: AES - 256 bit

Serial Port TerminalsDyNet RS485:Shield, GND, D-, D+, +12VAll available on screw terminals1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor sizeAlso available on RJ45 socket

Ethernet:Female RJ45 socket




ConstructionSteel wall mount case with epoxy finish



technical data




DNG100BTEthernet Gateway


DNG100BT Data Sheet Rev I April 2011

µP

WebServer

100BaseTEthernetRJ45

Supply:230V 0.1A1 Phase

L

N

E

+VE

D +

D -

GND

SHIELD

RS485DyNet

RJ12

RS485DyNet

125

176

226

165

122

265359

37

DMNG100BTEthernet Gateway

The Philips Dynalite DMNG100BT provides cost effective integration between Philips Dynalite control systems and Ethernet networks. It is designed to provide remote control of sites and link multiple sites together, using the Internet or a corporate LAN as a backbone. The device supports the TCP/IP protocol, with static or DHCP assigned IP addressing. Routing Mode links multiple DMNG100BT’s together in point to point or broadcast modes. An integral webserver allows Browser based control scenarios. The interface incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions. The DMNG100BT is housed in a small stand-alone enclosure that is an ideal size for installation behind racked equipment. The device is powered from the DyNet network and does not require to be supplied by mains voltage.

Supply15V DC supplied by the DyNet networkat 200mA


RS485 Port ConnectionsShield, GND, D-, D+, +12VAll available on screw terminals1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor sizeAlso available on RJ12 socket

Ethernet Port ConnectionsFemale RJ45 socket

Supported Ethernet ProtocolsTCP/IP (TCP & UDP)HTTPFTPTelnet

Data SecurityAES - 256 bit








technical data




DMNG100BTEthernet Gateway


DMNG100BT Data Sheet Rev E April 2011

30mm 80mm

150m

m

+VE

D +

D -

GND

SHIELD

µP

RJ45EthernetPort

Web Server

RS485DyNetPort

DDNG100BTEthernet Gateway

The Dynalite DDNG100BT provides cost effective integration between Philips Dynalite control systems and Ethernet networks. It is designed to provide remote control of sites and link multiple sites together, using the Internet or a corporate LAN as a backbone. The device supports the TCP/IP protocol, with static or DHCP assigned IP addressing. Routing Mode links multiple DDNG100BT’s together in point to point or broadcast modes. An integral webserver allows Browser based control scenarios.The interface incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions. The DDNG100BT is capable of routing DyNet to third-party systems, such as audio-visual and building automation systems, providing an integrated approach to total building control and energy management.

Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at <0.1A


Supported Ethernet ProtocolsTCP/IP (TCP & UDP)HTTPFTPTelnetEncryption: AES - 256 bit

DyNet DC Supply12V @ 90mA

Supply TerminalsPhase, Neutral1 x 4mm2 max conductor sizeDNG100BT - Earth link bar provided

Serial Port TerminalsDyNet RS485:Shield, GND, D-, D+, +12VAll available on screw terminals1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor sizeAlso available on RJ12 socket

Ethernet:Female RJ45 socket







technical data




DDNG100BTEthernet Gateway


DDNG100BT Data Sheet Rev D April 2011

µP

WebServer



L

N

E

+VE

D +

D -

GND

SHIELD

RS485DyNet

RJ12

RS485DyNet

DAC100BTArea Controller

The Philips Dynalite DAC100BT Area Controller is a network interface that also provides a range of area management and user control functions. The DAC100BT is ideal for commercial applications incorporating a common building services 100BaseT LAN backbone. The device supports the TCP/IP protocol, with static or DHCP assigned IP addressing. Routing Mode links multiple DAC100BT’s together in point to point or broadcast modes. An integral webserver allows browser based control scenarios. The interface incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions. The DAC100BT is also capable of routing DyNet to third party systems, such as audio-visual and building automation systems, providing an integrated approach to total building control and energy management. Key features include OLED panel display highlighting panel status, along with local area overrides, integrated user front panel and a range of test buttons and maintenance switch indicators. A mechanical key lock is provided for secure access.

Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at <0.1A


Supported Ethernet ProtocolTCP/IP (TCP & UDP)HTTPFTPTelnetEncryption: AES - 256 bit

DyNet DC Supply12V@ 90mA (supply for approx. 4 panels)

Supply TerminalsPhase, Neutral1 x 4mm2 max conductor sizeDNG100BT - Earth link bar provided

Serial Port TerminalsDyNet RS485:Shield, GND, D-, D+, +12VAll available on screw terminals1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor sizeAlso available on RJ12 socketEthernet:Female RJ45 socket


User ControlsProgrammable Emergency Lighting Test select buttons with status indicators.Local Area Override On, Off and Fade Up, Down buttons with status indication.4 programmable user control buttons.Panel enable/disable key switch.

Control Inputs1 x RS485 DyNet serial port8 x multi-purpose programmable dry contact /0-5V DC analogue inputs for load shedding, alarm and emergency lighting.






technical data




DAC100BTArea Controller


DAC100BT Data Sheet Rev C April 2011

125

176

226

165

122

265359

37

µP



L

N

E

+15V

D +

D -

GND

SHIELD

RS485DyNet

RJ12

RS485DyNet

Dry Contact& Analogue

Inputs

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN6

IN4

IN5

IN7

IN8

A/D

0V

5V

DNG232RS232 Network Gateway

The Philips Dynalite DNG232 is designed to enable cost effective serial port integration between the Philips Dynalite control system and third-party systems such as AV systems, lighting desks, data projectors, HVAC, BMS and security systems. The interface incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions.

A library of data formats is available for the systems integrator to choose from or, alternatively, a format can be created using the on board conditional logic engine to assemble and transmit user-defined data strings. Macro functions are available to simplify the control of multiple devices.

Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at<0.1A

Serial Ports1 x RS485 DyNet serial port2 x RS232 serial ports


RS232 Port Connections2 x Female DB9 connectors

RS232 Port ModesDTE, DCE, selected by jumpers

RS232 Data FormatsBaudrate: 600-250kMax packet length: 254 bytesData bits: 7/8Stop bits: 1/2Parity: odd/even/noneFlow Control: none/RTS-CTS

DyNet DC Supply12V @ 90mA (approx. 6 panels)








technical data

RS232 control lines Pin Function Implementation

1 DCD (data carrier detect) Not connected

2 RD (received data) Connected to UART

3 TD (transmitted data) Connected to UART

4 DTR (data terminal ready) Not connected

5 SG (signal ground) Connected to Ground

6 DSR (data set ready) Not connected

7 RTS (request to send) Software controlled

8 CTS (clear to send) Software controlled

9 RI (ring indicator) Not connected




DNG232RS232 Network Gateway


DNG232 Data Sheet Rev J April 2011

125

176

226

165

122

265359

37

+VE

D +

D -

G ND

S HIELD

µP

R S 232P ort 2

5 - S G

3 - R D

4 - DTR

2 - T D

1 - DCD

8 - C TS

9 - R I

7 - R TS

6 - DSR

DCE / DTESelector

R S 485DyNet

P ort

R S 232P ort 1

5 - S G

3 - R D

4 - DTR

2 - T D

1 - DCD

8 - C TS

9 - R I

7 - R TS

6 - DSR

S upply :230V 0.1A

1 P hase

L

N

E

DMNG232RS232 Network Gateway

The Philips Dynalite DMNG232 is designed to enable cost effective serial port integration between the Philips Dynalite control system and third-party systems such as AV systems, lighting desks, data projectors, HVAC, BMS and security systems. The interface incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions. A library of data formats is available for the systems integrator to choose from or, alternatively, a format can be created using the on board conditional logic engine to assemble, transmit and receive user-defined data strings. Macro functions are available to simplify the control of multiple devices. The DMNG232 is housed in a small stand alone enclosure that is an ideal size for installation behind racked equipment. The device is powered from the DyNet network and does not require to be supplied by mains voltage.

Supply15V DC supplied by the DyNet networkat 50mA

Serial Ports1 x RS485 DyNet serial port1 x RS232 serial port


RS232 Port ConnectionsFemale DB9 connector










technical data














DMNG232RS232 Network Gateway


DMNG232 Data Sheet Rev H April 2011

+VE

D +

D -

GND

SHIELD

µP

RS232Port

5 - SG

3 - RD

4 - DTR

2 - TD

1 - DCD

8 - CTS

9 - RI

7 - RTS

6 - DSR

DCE / DTESelector

RS485DyNetPort

30mm 80mm

150m

m

DDNG232RS232 Network Gateway

The Philips Dynalite DDNG232 is designed to enable cost effective serial port integration between the Philips Dynalite control system and third-party systems such as AV systems, lighting desks, data projectors, HVAC, BMS and security systems. The interface incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions. A library of data formats is available for the systems integrator to choose from or, alternatively, a format can be created using the on board conditional logic engine to assemble and transmit user-defined data strings. Macro functions are available to simplify the control of multiple devices.

Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at<0.1A

Serial Ports1 x RS485 DyNet serial port1 x RS232 serial port


RS232 Port Connections2 x Female DB9 connector



DyNet DC Supply12V @ 90mA (approx. 6 panels)








technical data














DDNG232RS232 Network Gateway


DDNG232 Data Sheet Rev D April 2011

+VE

D +

D -

G ND

S HIELD

µP

R S 232P ort 2

5 - S G

3 - R D

4 - DTR

2 - T D

1 - DCD

8 - C TS

9 - R I

7 - R TS

6 - DSR

DCE / DTESelector

R S 485DyNet

P ort

R S 232P ort 1

5 - S G

3 - R D

4 - DTR

2 - T D

1 - DCD

8 - C TS

9 - R I

7 - R TS

6 - DSR

S upply :230V 0.1A

1 P hase

L

N

E

DDNG485Network Gateway

The Philips Dynalite DDNG485 is a flexible network communications gateway designed for DyNet RS485 networks. The two opto-isolated RS485 ports enable the DDNG485 to implement a trunk and spur topology on large project sites, with the device providing a high-speed backbone opto-coupled to many lower speed spurs. It also provides isolation of electrical faults to individual spurs. The device is also designed to enable cost effective integration between the Philips Dynalite control system and third-party devices. The on-board Programmable Logic Controller can assemble and transmit user-defined data strings. The DDNG485 has a DMX mode that can transmit or receive up to 64 channels of DMX512, with automatic DyNet conversion and Task triggering. This is a popular method of allowing a lighting operator temporary control of the house lights from the DMX lighting console in an auditorium scenario.

Supply12V DC max. 375mA from the DyNet Network, fed via Port 1

Control Ports2 x RS485 DyNet/DyNet II serial ports

Serial Port Isolation3.75KV RMS optical isolation between ports


DMX Functions- DMX receive: 64 channels- DMX transmit: 64 channels

Internal ControlsProgrammable Logic Controller - 64 Tasks

Serial Port TerminalsPort 1:SHIELD, GND, D+, D-, +12V, AUX1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor sizePort 2:SHIELD, GND, D+, D-, +12V1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size1 x RJ12 socket for plug in connection



ConstructionPolycarbonate DIN Rail case (6 units wide)



technical data

topology example

DUS703C

Universal Sensor

DyN

et T

runk

DyNet Spur

DUS703CUniversal Sensor

To up to 123 more devices

DUS703CDDNG485

Network GatewayUniversal Sensor

DyN

et T

runk

DyNet Spur

DUS703CUniversal Sensor


To otherfloors

To otherfloors

DBC410

CH4CH3CH2CH1

CH1CH2CH3CH4

EL1

DBC410

CH4CH3CH2CH1

CH1CH2CH3CH4

EL1

DBC410

CH4CH3CH2CH1

CH1CH2CH3CH4

EL1DBC410

CH4CH3CH2CH1

CH1CH2CH3CH4

EL1

DyN

et T

runk




DyNet - Up to 2 KilometersTo network devicesTo network devices

DDNG485

DDNG485

DDNG485

DDNG485

DDNG485






DDNG485 Data Sheet Rev K April 2011

+VE

D +

D -

GND

SHIELD

µP

Port 1RS485DyNet

+VE

D +

D -

GND

SHIELD

Port 2RJ12 Socket

Port 2RS485DyNetDMX512

AUX

DC/DC

94.5

6946

38

51

75

59

105

DDNI485Network Passive Gateway

The Philips Dynalite DDNI485 is designed for cost effective optical isolation of DyNet RS485 networks. The two opto-isolated RS485 ports enable the DDNI485 to implement a trunk and spur topology, with each spur being electrically isolated from the others so a fault in one section of the network will be contained. It is a “passive” device that does not require programming.

Supply12V DC 100mA from the DyNet Network, fed via Port 1

Control Ports2 x RS485 DyNet/DyNet II serial ports

Serial Port Isolation2.5KV surge rated optical isolation between ports

Serial Port TerminalsPort 1:SHIELD, GND, D+, D-, +12V1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size1 x RJ12 socket for plug in connection

Port 2:SHIELD, GND, D+, D-, +12V1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size1 x RJ12 socket for plug in connection






technical data

topology examples

DUS703C

Universal Sensor

DyN

et T

run

k

DyNet Spur

DUS703C

Universal Sensor


DUS703C

DDNI485Network Isolator

Universal Sensor

DyN

et T

run

k

DyNet Spur

DUS703C

Universal Sensor


To otherfloors

To otherfloors

DBC410

CH4CH3CH2CH1

CH1CH2CH3CH4

EL1

DBC410

CH4CH3CH2CH1

CH1CH2CH3CH4

EL1

DBC410

CH4CH3CH2CH1

CH1CH2CH3CH4

EL1

DBC410

CH4CH3CH2CH1

CH1CH2CH3CH4

EL1

DyN

et T

run

k




DyNet - Up to 2 Kilometers

To network devicesTo network devices

DDNI485

DDNI485

DDNI485

DDNI485

DDNI485




DDNI485Network Passive Gateway


DDNI485 Data Sheet Rev E April 2011

+VE IN

D +

D -

G ND

S HIELD

P ort 1R S 485DyNet

+VE IN

D +

D -

G ND

S HIELD

P ort 2R J 12 S ocke t

P ort 2R S 485DyNet

P ort 1R J 12

S ocke t

DC /DC

94.5

6946

38

51

7559

105

DNG485RS485/DMX Gateway

The Philips Dynalite DNG485 is a flexible network communications bridge designed for RS485 networks. The two opto-isolated RS485 ports enable the DNG485 to implement a trunk and spur topology on large project sites, with the bridge providing a high-speed backbone opto-coupled to many lower speed spurs. It also provides isolation of electrical faults to individual spurs and augments network security and robustness through the definition of packet filtering rules for each direction. The DNG485 is capable of routing DyNet to third-party systems, such as audio-visual and building automation systems, providing an integrated approach to total building control and energy management. The DDNG485 has a DMX mode that can transmit or receive up to 64 channels of DMX512, with automatic DyNet conversion and Task triggering.

Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at Max. 0.25A

Control Ports2 x RS485 DyNet serial ports

Serial Port Isolation3.75KV RMS optical isolation between ports


Internal ControlsProgrammable Logic ControllerPacket filteringDyNet to DyNet II translation

DMX512 Support-DMX Receive: 64 channels-DMX Transmit: 64 channels

DyNet DC SupplySerial Port 1: 12V @ 450mA (approx. 20 panels)Serial Port 2: 12V @ 180mA (approx. 9 panels)

Supply TerminalsPhase, Neutral1 x 4mm2 max conductor sizeEarth link bar provided

Serial Port TerminalsSerial Port 1:SHIELD, GND, D+, D-, +12V1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor sizeSerial Port 2:SHIELD, GND, D+, D-, +12V1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size1 x RJ12 socket for plug in connection







technical data

typology examples

DUS703C

Universal Sensor

DyN

et T

run

k

DyNet Spur

DUS703C

Universal Sensor


DUS703C

DNG485Network Gateway

Universal Sensor

DyN

et T

run

k

DyNet Spur

DUS703C

Universal Sensor


To otherfloors

To otherfloors

DBC410

CH4CH3CH2CH1

CH1CH2CH3CH4

EL1

DBC410

CH4CH3CH2CH1

CH1CH2CH3CH4

EL1

DBC410

CH4CH3CH2CH1

CH1CH2CH3CH4

EL1

DBC410

CH4CH3CH2CH1

CH1CH2CH3CH4

EL1

DyNet - Up to 2 Kilometers

To powered network devicesTo powered network devices

Trunk/Spur

Buffer

DNG485

1 2


DNG485

1 2


DNG485

1 2


DNG485

1 2




DNG485RS485/DMX Gateway


DNG485 Data Sheet Rev G April 2011

+VE

D +

D -

GND

µP

OptoIsolators

RS485DyNetPort 1


LN

E

+VE

D +

D -

GND

SHIELD

RS485DyNetPort 2

Port 2RJ12Socket

DC/DC

365

mm

225 mm

165 mm

345

mm

320m

m

80m

m

75mm

DTK622Network Gateway

DTK622 network gateway provides passive integration to a PC or a RS232 system.

The DTK622-232 allows for full duplex integration to RS232. Useful for linking the Philips Dynalite system with an AV or airconditioning system that supports RS232 communications.

A DTK622-USB provides a useful interface between any PC and the Philips Dynalite system, The DTK622-USB allows complete access to all network messages present on DyNet. To be used in conjunction with any of the Philips Dynalite software, this tool can be used to commission, diagnose/repair with Envision Project or used as a permanent gateway to the system for the head-end software EnvisionManager.

Connectors DTK622-USB:1 x USB type B connector2 x RJ12 sockets (RS485 DyNet)

DTK622-232:1 x D9 Female socket (RS232)2 x RJ12 sockets (RS485 DyNet)



EnclosureABS enclosure



Supplied withDTK622-USB:1 x USB cable, type A to type B 1 x RJ12 cable1 x Dingus

DTK622-232:1 x 232 cable male to female connector1 x RJ12 cable1 x Dingus

technical data

DTK622-USB

DTK622-232

options DyNet RS485 <-> USB gateway-USBDyNet RS485 <-> RS232 gateway-232




DTK622Network Gateway

DTK622-232 DTK622-USB

DTK622 Data Sheet Rev A July 2011

RJ12 - 6 Pole wiring

+ 12V

GroundD +D -

BROWN - PIN 1

YELLOW - PIN 2

GREEN - PIN 3

RED - PIN 4

WHITE - PIN 5

BROWN:YELLOW:

GREEN:RED:

WHITE:DRAIN:

Not connected

DRAIN - PIN 6

Drain

DDNI-LONLON Gateway

The DDNI-LON is designed to provide a LON single point interface to a Philips Dynalite control system. The DDNI-LON is based on Echelon Corporation’s Neuron 3120 chip, which supports 63 SNVT’s and will support preset control of 100 presets per area for 30 areas. Multiple DDNI-LON devices can be cascaded together to accommodate larger or more complex DyNet networks. The device is configured to operate on the LON network with Echelon Corporation’s LonMaker.

Supply12V DC @ 50mA from the DyNet network

Control Ports1 x RS485 DyNet serial port1 x TP/FTT10A twisted pair LonWorks port

User ControlsDyNet Service SwitchDyNet Diagnostic LEDLON Service SwitchLON Diagnostic LED



EnclosureABS DIN Rail enclosure (6 unit)


WeightPacked weight 0.6Kg

technical data




DDNI-LONLON Gateway


DDNI-LON Data Sheet Rev H April 2011

µPDyNetRS485

+VE

D +

D -

GNDSHIELD

TP/FT10LonWorks B

A94

.5

6946

38

51

75

59

105

DDNG-KNXKNX Network Gateway

The DDNG-KNX allows for high level integration between the Philips Dynalite system and BMS using the KNX protocol. This gateway between the two systems allows high level communication, opening up a number of integration opportunities.

When using the DDNG-KNX gateway, a projects BMS system can be used to directly trigger tasks, timed based events and the Philips Dynalite system can report back current system statuses. This allows for more flexible integration solutions.

Supply12V DC 50mA from the DyNet Network, fed via Port 1

Control Ports1 x RS485 DyNet/DyNet II serial ports1 x KNX

Serial Port Isolation2.5KV surge isolation between ports

User ControlsService switch DyNet & KNXDiagnostic LED DyNet & KNX

Internal ControlsProgrammable Logic Controller - 64 Tasks

Serial Port TerminalsPort 1: DyNetSHIELD, GND, D+, D-, +12V, AUX1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size

Port 2: KNXKNX +, KNX - 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size plug




ConstructionPolycarbonate DIN Rail case (6 units wide)

DimensionsH 94.5mm x W 105mm x D 75mm


technical data

topology example




DDNG-KNXKNX Network Gateway


DDNG-KNX Data Sheet Rev A July 2011

7551

38

4669

105

94

DDNG-BACnetBACnet Network Gateway

The DDNG-BACnet allows for high level integration between the Philips Dynalite system and BMS using the BACnet protocol. This gateway between the two systems allows high level communication, opening up a number of integration opportunities.

When using the DDNG-BACnet gateway, a projects BMS system can be used to directly trigger tasks, timed based events and the Philips Dynalite system can report back current system statuses. This allows for more flexible integration solutions.

Supply15V VDC 1A

Control Ports1 x RS232 serial port1 x Ethernet BACnet

Serial Port TerminalsPort 1: RS232D9 connector Female

Port 2: Ethernet RJ45 socketBACnet Ethernet.

Port 3: Ethernet RJ45 socketWeb server configuration.



ConstructionPolycarbonate DIN Rail case



technical data

options 200 BACnet addressing points -2001000 BACnet addressing points-1000




DDNG-BACnetBACnet Network Gateway

recommended installation

DDNG-BACnet Data Sheet Rev A July 2011

Additional Philips Dynalite devices shown are not supplied with BACnet Gateway

Part number Description

DDNP1501 Network Power supplyDTK622-232 RS232 <-> RS485 Bidirectional GatewayDPN308N Wall plate network socket

See other product data sheets for more details


The DDMIDC8 is designed to enable cost effective input integration to the Philips Dynalite control system from third-party systems such as Security, HVAC and BMS. The interface incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions. Eight digital inputs are provided, each of which can be individually configured as a dry contact input or a 0-24V AC/DC input. Each input has an LED indicator to provide visual status indication, and all inputs are individually optically isolated for high noise immunity. In addition to the digital inputs, four 0-5V/0-10V (software selectable) analogue inputs are provided. The DDMIDC8 is housed in a 6 unit wide DIN enclosure for installation into switchboards and also has internal fixing points that allow the device to be fixed to a surface without the use of DIN rail. The device is powered from the DyNet network and does not require a separate mains voltage supply.

Supply12V DC supplied by the DyNetnetwork37mA with all Dry Contacts open68mA with all Dry Contacts closed

Digital Inputs8 x opto-isolated inputs, each orconfigurable to Dry Contact 0-24VAC/DC (Safety Extra Low Voltage only)

Digital Input IsolationOptical isolation (2.5kV surge rated)

Analogue Inputs4 x inputs, configurable to 0-5V or0-10V (Safety Extra Low Voltage only)

Analogue Input Impedance20K Ohm

Serial Port1 x RS485 DyNet serial port

User ControlsLED status indicators for digital inputs


Digital Input TerminalsA, B for each input1 x 2.5mm2 conductor size

Analogue Input TerminalsCH, GND, for each input1 x 2.5mm2 conductor size






technical data






DDMIDC8 Data Sheet Rev M April 2011

7551

38

4669

105

94

mm

mm

mm

mm

mm

mm

mm

+VE

D +

D -

GND

SHIELD

µP

GND

CH2

CH1

GND

CH3

CH4

GND

GND

0-5V/0-10VAnalogue Inputs

A/D

A / D

A / D

A / D

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Input 5

Input 6

Input 7

Input 8

+5V

DyNetRS485

Optical Isolation Barrier

Opto IsolatedDry Contact/0-24VAC/DC Digital Inputs

DPMI940Dry Contact Gateway

The DPMI940 is a four way dry contact interface designed to allow mechanical switches and relays to interface to the DyNet network. The function of each input is programmable and the small size of the product combined with the inputs being presented on flyleads makes it perfect for installation behind multi-gang switch grids. In addition to use as a simple dry contact interface, the DPMI940 has a “motion detector” mode that turns a third-party motion detector into a fully featured DyNet sensor. The flylead that connects to the motion relay and tamper switch also has a 0V and +12VDC pair for powering the motion detector from the DyNet network power supply. The small size of the DPMI940 allows it to be fitted completely inside many brands of motion detectors.

Supply12V at 20mA, from the DyNet network


Inputs4 x dry contact inputs

Dry Contact Flyleads+12V, GND, GND, SW1, SW2, SW3,SW4; all presented on a 2mm pitch x160mm long ribbon cable

Serial Port TerminalsSHIELD, GND, D+, D-, +15V1 x 2mm2 max conductor size




ConstructionBare circuit board with heatshrink cover


WeightPacked weight 15.5 grams

technical data

DPMI940




DPMI940Dry Contact Gateway


DPMI940 Data Sheet Rev D April 2011

40 mm Ribbon Cable

19m

m

side view

top view

19m

m

µP GND

+12V

DyNetRS485

AUX+VE

D +D -

GNDShield

GND

GND

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4

DryContactInputs

+12VDCOutput

Ribbon CableBlack Trace

DIR-TX8Infra-red Transmitter

The DIR-TX8 is designed to provide cost effective integration and control of all types of infrared controllable devices, such as AV equipment. User-friendly PC software is used to program the DIR-TX8 with common IR codes from the supplied library. The DIR-TX8 also has an integral IR receiver that is used to learn and save previously unknown IR codes. Multiple IR codes can be arranged into macros and played back at any time with a single DyNet command. The device includes an internal Programmable Logic Controller and supports all Philips Dynalite script commands.

Supply12V @ DC 50mA, supplied from DyNet network

IR Transmit Outputs8 independent, individually controllableoutputs. Connector type is 4 x 3.5mm stereo jacks which accept stereo and mono plugs.

IR Inputs1 IR input, used for learning and savingunknown IR codes

Control Inputs1 x RS485 DyNet serial port1 x AUX programmable dry contact input


User ControlsService SwitchDiagnostic LEDIR Transmit/Learn LED






DIR-EM2 (supplied separately)2 x separately controllable IR Emitter LEDs2 metre lead lengthTerminates in 3.5mm stereo plugAdhesive mounting pads supplied

technical data

pc software

DIR-TX8

DIR-EM2(supplied separately)




DIR-TX8Infra-red Transmitter


DIR-TX8 Data Sheet Rev H April 2011

30mm 80mm

150m

m

+VE

D +

D -

GND

SHIELD

µP

IR Zone 1 (CH1A = Tip, CH1B = Ring)RS485DyNetPort

AUX

IR Learner

IR Outputs4 x 3.5mm stereo jacks

IR Zone 2 (CH2A = Tip, CH2B = Ring)



DDFCUC024 Fan Coil Unit Controller

The DDFCUC024 is a Fan Coil Unit controller designed for direct connection to components commonly found in airconditioning systems. Triac outputs are provided for controlling hot and chilled water valves, relay outputs for driving fan motors, a high capacity relay output is available for electrical heaters. Inputs are provided for a resistive type temperature sensor and the device can use data from a networked temperature sensor such as the Philips Dynalite DTS900. Programmable auxiliary inputs are provided for peripherals such as smoke detectors, motion detectors, window open/close sensors and airflow detectors. The device can be networked with other equipment, such as Philips Dynalite Revolution DRP wall stations and DTP160 touchscreen, via an onboard RS485 DyNet port.

Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at10A

Outputs1 x dual triac 24VAC output for open/close or floating hot water valve

1 x dual triac 24VAC output for open/close or floating chilled water valve

3 x 230VAC relay outputs for high/med/low fan control

Temperature Sensor Input20K NTC(networked temperature sensors alsosupported)

Dry Contact Inputs3, programmable for devices including:- window sensor- motion detector- airflow sensor

Control Inputs1 x RS485 DyNet serial port

DyNet DC Supply12V @ 120mA (Max. 6 panels)



Output TerminalsHot water valve:common, open, close,2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size

Chilled water valve:common, open, close,2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size

Fan:neutral, low, med, high2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size






technical data




DDFCUC024Fan Coil Unit Controller

wiring diagram

DDFUCU024 Data Sheet Rev G April 2011

ShieldGND

+D-D

+VE

mounting dimensions

Envision Software

EnvisionProject and EnvisionManager software delivers powerful functionality, time saving and user-friendly benefits to ensure success through the life of a project. This fully integrated end-to-end solution is the next generation software, to deliver advanced lighting control commissioning and management.

DLight III ServerGateway Integration Software

DLight III Server (EnvisionManager) is designed to provide high level integration and control options to a Philips Dynalite DyNet network via a Local Area Network. The DyNet network is connected to a server PC’s COM or USB port or over Ethernet when using a DNG100BT. Information can then be exchanged via client software running on the server PC or clients connecting remotely over the Ethernet network using TCP/IP. Integration to other services is made simple via the use of a set of calls using an industry standard DCOM interface. DLight III Server accompanied by it’s main MapView client software is an inexpensive solution for providing occupants of open plan office space with control over their local environment. The MapView management software provides a sophisticated control and monitoring environment that can be tailored to the specifications of the customer. Using a multi-page graphical environment, a building manager has quick and easy control and status reflection of the lighting system. The system provides status indicators of alarm events, such as device offline, circuit breaker trips and lamp failures – both visually in real-time and via reports. Diagnostic and maintenance data such as lamp burn time is also available as well as features such as Emergency Lamp Test and Notional Power reporting. TrayPan end-user client software can reside in the tool tray of desktop PC’s in the open plan office use the existing LAN to communicate with DLight III Server, provides a cost benefit over the provision of local control panels that would otherwise be required. The optional DLight III Toolbox Software Development Kit provides a rapid integration environment for connection toBuilding Management Systems. A set of system calls and example clients, including source code, are provided to assist with developing integration solutions and custom clients. The DLight III Server license model takes the size and scope of the Philips Dynalite system into account, making the productaffordable for both large and small sized systems.

LAN InterfaceEthernet - TCP/IP

Server Software InterfacesDCOM

DyNet Interface1 serial interface, via USB or RS232 portOptional DNG100BT connectivity

Hardware Requirements*Hardware Platform: PCProcessor: Minimum 2Ghz Dual CoreHard Disk: Minimum 10Gb free spaceSystem Memory: Minimum 2GB RAMGraphics Memory: Minimum 256MB RAMSerial Ports: One free RS232 or USB portNetwork: Ethernet Network card1 x Philips Dynalite PC Node adaptor

We recommend the PC is powered from an Uninterruptible Power Supply

Operating Systems SupportedWindows XP Professional SP3Windows 7 SP1Windows 2003 Server SP1Windows 2008 Server SP2

ClientsMapView - Master control GUITrayPan virtual PC Panel

Client InterfacesDLight III ToolBox SDK optionally available to assist creating custom clients and/or integration gateways

Client SecurityIntegrates with and uses Windows Domain and Workgroup Security Groups and Users. Rights configurable on a User and Group basis.

Ordering InformationDL3SBL Server with 10 Device/Area** LicensesDL3SUL Additional Device/Area* LicenseDL3TB ToolBox SDK

*Note: minimum requirements will vary depending on the size of the site and the number of simultaneously connected clients. Consult the DLight III Server Implementation Guide for more details.**The required Licenses are based on the quantity of networked hardware devices or the number of Areas

technical data




DLight III ServerGateway Integration Software

typical application

DLight III Server Data Sheet Rev H April 2011

traypan operation traypan setup options

Network Devices & Commissioning Tools

To bring all the different devices together, Philips Dynalite supports a range of network devices that are useful in creating a problem free installation.

DDNP1501Network Power Supply

The DDNP1501 is a 15V DC 1.5 Amps regulated power supply, designed to supplement the DyNet network DC supply. The switchmode design allows the device to be used with a wide range of supply voltages without the need for a manual selector setting. Normally a DyNet network is self-powered by the built-in DC supplies integrated within all mains powered devices. However, in certain applications this supply may need to be supplemented with the DDNP1501 when using peripherals with a high supply requirement, such as edge lit touchscreens. The DDNP1501 is housed in a 6 unit DIN rail mount enclosure that has a circuit breaker profile. This enables the device to be installed in all types of electrical equipment enclosures, including those with cover apertures specifically designed for circuit breakers.


Output15 Volt DC @ 1.5 Amps (@230V supply)15 Volt DC @ 1.0 Amps (@110V supply)

Electrical DesignSwitchmode

ProtectionSelf resetting overload protectionShort circuit proofAutomatic thermal shutdown


Output TerminalsGND, GND, +15V, +15V1 x 4mm2 max conductor size






technical data




DDNP1501Network Power Supply


DDNP1501 Data Sheet Rev G May 2009

+15V

GND

SHIELD

Output:15VDC

1.5A at 230V

Supply:100 - 240VAC0.5 A 1 Phase

LNE

LOOP

LOOP

94.5

6946

38

51

75

59

105

DDPB22RJ12Network Junction Box

Allowing installers to have onsite flexible networking options, the DDPB22RJ12 allows for 22 DyNet flat cables of the Philips Dynalite system, to be terminated together in one location. Acting as a junction box, the DDPB22RJ12 takes advantage of the RJ12 connection system allowing for a quick install and easy implementation of a network star topology.

Connectors 1 x 5 way screw terminal 22 x RJ12 sockets

User ControlsInternal Diagnostic LED for network connection






Flat network cable ordering codes:200m Roll: DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLE10m Lead: DYNET-SFLATE6-CABLE-10M5M Lead: DYNET-SFLATE6-CABLE-5M3M Lead: DYNET-SFLATE6-CABLE-3M

technical data

RJ12 - 6 Pole wiring + 12V

GroundD +D -

BROWN - PIN 1

YELLOW - PIN 2

GREEN - PIN 3

RED - PIN 4

WHITE - PIN 5

BROWN:YELLOW:

GREEN:RED:

WHITE:DRAIN:

Not connected

DRAIN - PIN 6

Drain




DDPB22RJ12Network Junction Box


DDPB22RJ12 Data Sheet Rev A July 2011

DyNet Data Cable100MHz 100Ω STP 4 pair CAT5E

DyNet data cable is specifically designed for high reliability RS485 network wiring. In addition to a twisted pair forRS485 data, conductors are provided to supply DC power to network powered peripherals. Conductors are shieldedfor maximum data integrity. The data cable is flexible, as all conductors are stranded, which also allows for robusttermination into pressure plate style terminals used on Philips Dynalite equipment. The extra thick outer jacket is mains ratedfor use in switchboards and enhances the robustness of the cable. The cable is supplied in 305 metre lengths.

Conductors4 twisted pairs and shield

Construction: Stranded Bare Copper 7 x Ø 0.23mm (24AWG)

Insulation: Polyethylene PE Ø 1.00±0.02mm

Pair IdentificationPAIR 1: blue/white-bluePAIR 2: orange/white-orangePAIR 3: green/white-greenPAIR 4: brown/white-brown

ShieldingAluminium/Mylar tape, 100% coverageDraw Wire: Tinned Copper Ø 0.51mm (24AWG)

Mechanical Characteristics Outer jacket construction: PVCThickness: 0.74±0.05mm Ø 7.3±0.20mm

Outer jacket colour: Orange

Minimum cable bending radius installed:8 times outer cable diameter

Maximum tensile load - Installation: 100 N

Maximum tensile load - Installed: No stretch

Electrical PropertiesCharacteristic Impedance: 100±5Ω @ 100MHz

DC loop resistance: Max. 190 Ω/km

DC resistance imbalance: Max. 2.5%

Dielectric strength between pairs: 1KV RMS/minute

Dielectric strength conductors to screen: 2.5KV RMS/minute

Capacitance: 56pF/m

Capacitance Imbalance: Max. 3.3pF/m

Velocity of Propagation: <620 nsec/100m @ 100MHzΩ

Outer jacket voltage rating: 600V RMS

Operating EnvironmentInstallation: 0°C to +50°COperation: -20°C to +60°C

Standards ComplianceTIA/EIA-568B.2 Category 5EUL Verified E227171ACA Approval N1756

PackagingCable length: 305 metresCarton: H 425mm x W 212mm x D 425mmWeight: 15.0 Kg

Order CodeDYNET-STP-CABLE

technical data

electrical performance Frequency Attenua-tion, Max

(dB/100M)

NeXt(dB)

PS NEXT (dB)

ELFEXT (dB)

PS ELFEXT (dB)

Return Loss (dB/100m)

1.0MHz 3.10 65 62 64 61 20.00

4.0MHz 6.10 56 53 52 49 23.00

10.0MHz 9.70 50 47 44 41 25.00

16.0MHz 12.40 47 44 40 37 25.00

20.0MHz 13.90 46 43 38 35 25.00

31.25MHz 17.60 43 40 34 31 24.30

62.5MHz 25.50 38 35 28 25 21.50

100.0MHz 33.00 35 32 24 21 20.10




DyNet Data Cable100MHz 100Ω STP 4 pair CAT5E

DyNet Data Cable Data Sheet Rev F May 2009

DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLECable Roll and Cable Kits

Flat data cable is specifically designed for high reliability localised network wiring as found in residential applications.In addition to a conductor pair for data, conductors are provided to supply DC power to network powered peripherals.Conductors have an overall shield for maximum data integrity. The data cable is flexible, as all conductors are stranded.It is designed for rapid crimp termination into RJ12 plugs for use with Philips Dynalite products with supporting RJ12 sockets.The cable is supplied in 200 metre rolls, or in pre-terminated leads of 3, 5 and 10 metre lengths.

Conductors

5 x 26AWG 12/0.12mm

Shield

Drain: Copper foil wrapped 24AWG 9/0.12mm

Shield: Aluminium/polyester tape

Conductor Colours

Shield: silver1: white2: Red3: Green4: Yellow5: Black

Mechanical Characteristics

Outer jacket construction: PVC

Cross section Dimensions: 2.65mm x 6.95mm

Outer jacket colour: Orange

Electrical Properties

Conductor DC loop resistance: Max. 240Ω/km

Drain DC resistance: Max. 40Ω/km

Operating Environment

Installation: 0°C to +50°COperation: -20°C to +60°C

Packaging

Cable length: 200 metresWeight: 8.0 Kg

Order Codes

200m Roll: DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLE10m Lead: DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLE-10M5m Lead: DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLE-5M3m Lead: DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLE-3M

technical data

Stripped back cable

DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLE

DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLE-5M

BROWN - PIN 1

YELLOW - PIN 2

GREEN - PIN 3

RED - PIN 4

WHITE - PIN 5

DRAIN - PIN 6

BROWN:YELLOW:

GREEN:RED:

WHITE:DRAIN:

Not connected+ 12VD -D +GroundDrain




DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLECable Roll and Cable Kits

DyNet-SFLAT6-Cable Data Sheet Rev B May 2009

DPP601Portable Programmer

The DPP601 is a portable, hand-held programmer designed for making programming changes to a Philips Dynalite system without the use of a computer. The DPP601 plugs into any point on the DyNet network and the LCD display will help guide the user step by step through the programming task. Information such as channel, area and preset scene names are automatically uploaded from the network to assist in programming. The DPP601 programmer can copy individual channel levels and preset scene values to reduce set-up time. It can be used in conjunction with standard control panels to access preset scenes that are not commonly used or that require protection from accidental selection. The DPP601 has a astronomical 365 day timer clock with Sunrise/Sunset tracking, automatic Daylight Saving adjustment and powerful macro and conditional logic functions. The timer clock interfaces with other devices over the DyNet RS485 network to automate tasks and events.


Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port via an RJ12socket.

Network Connection MethodRJ11<>RJ11 patchlead(5 metre patchlead supplied)

User Controls1 x 110 x 33 pixel rear lit LCD display1 x 12 button LCD transport keys1 x 12 button numeric keypad

ClockBattery back up64 tasks




ConstructionPowdercoat pressed metal body



technical data




DPP601Portable Programmer

mounting dimensions

DPP610 Data Sheet Rev H April 2011

143mm

25mm

79m

m

23mm

3. Application G

uides

application guide aged care

Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Aged Care Page 1 of 8

This application guide contains information on: q

Assistive Living solutions using the Dynalite control system

Integration with airconditioning

Integration with security and nurse call systems

Control of equipment such as blinds and floor heating

Control through wall mount touchscreens

Monitoring through motion sensors

The Philips Dynalite control system lends itself well to providing a safe and secure living environment for

the elderly. Living facilities that incorporate this type of technology can afford the occupants much

greater independence and in doing so, ease the burden on health services infrastructure. This type of

accommodation is often referred to as „assistive living‟. These residences are often built in complexes

where all are connected to a central monitoring office that can readily dispatch nurses or alternative

health care services through a nurse call type system.

The typical assistive living unit incorporates smart sensors that can monitor activity during nominated

times and flag potential emergency situations much earlier. In addition to this, services such as heating

and airconditioning can be easily monitored through user-friendly touchscreens. The security system can

also be interfaced to the same touchscreen to alleviate the complexity associated with several dedicated

control panels. Other servers such as electric blinds and curtains can also be controlled from lighting

control panels to reduce the complexity and effort, in addition to allowing automated control take care

of day-to-day, potentially strenuous, activities. Smoke sensors are interfaced into the Philips Dynalite

system to allow early warning of potential fire hazards by illuminating egress paths. The occupants can

also alert monitoring staff through nurse call controls on the touchscreen or lighting control panels.

Different lighting settings can also make the unit much safer, avoiding potential accidents while moving

around in the unit during the night.

typical layout

Page 2 of 8 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Aged Care

system outline All the internal lighting is dimmable and labeled from D1-D4. Lighting in the courtyard and vanity is non-

dimmable labeled R1 & R2. Lamp numbers per lighting group are kept low so not to over light the areas.

Smaller lighting groups allow for more effective and efficient lighting design and flexible control

solutions. This allows for scenes to be created by having multiple lighting groups set to different levels

to suit the user‟s requirements. To facilitate the use of such a lighting plan, the DIN series of controllers

lend themselves perfectly to the task. The Dynalite DIN series controllers occupy a smaller footprint

require less real estate in the distribution board and have many independently controlled channels that

have a low rating.

In this example, the floor-heating and airconditioning are monitored by Philips Dynalite through the use

of DTS900 temperature sensor (DTS1) in the living room. Every room that has floor-heating also uses a

temperature sensor (for simplicity, this detail is not depicted in the diagram on the following page). The

DTS900 temperature sensor can be programmed to provide temperature feedback for the area it‟s

installed, to the Philips Dynalite control system. If the temperature reaches a particular set point, the

sensor will automatically send a message through the Dynet network that will switch off the floor

heating or airconditioning system. The same network message could also be used to trigger other events

if required. The temperature trigger levels are set through the touchscreen and can be manually

activated from there or from any of the control panels. In addition, a touchscreen can display the

current ambient temperature of any area from the DTS900 for system feedback.

Different services within the accommodation can be integrated together to achieve advanced functions.

For example, the lighting control motion detector can activate and de-activate when the security system

is armed and disarmed. In this scenario, the motion sensors are programmed to detect movement over

defined times after the security system is disarmed by the occupant. If no movement has been detected

for a certain period of time, a call is sent to a monitoring office, flagging the possibility of a medical

emergency. In addition, the touchscreen and all control panels have the ability to flag the same type of

alert if the nominated button is pressed longer than three seconds. The smoke sensors are interfaced to

the Philips Dynalite system and will generate a similar type of alert back to the estates security in the

event of fire hazard. Multiple functions can be triggered when one of the alarms is activated such as all

lights are turned to full and the blinds and curtains opened. In addition, the occupants can wear a third-

party radio frequency (RF) pendant transmitter with a panic button. The third-party RF receiver can

detect this remote press (from within the unit) and communicate back through the Philips Dynalite

system, the need for an alarm to be triggered to the estates security.

Within the bathroom, there is a water solenoid that prevents water overflow or the likelihood of water

scalding if it‟s been accidentally left on. The third-party water level and temperature sensor provides

feedback to the Philips Dynalite control system so that it can turn off the water valve (R12) and triggers

an audible alarm so the occupant knows that the water temperature maybe too hot (or cold).


The Philips Dynalite touchscreen allows occupants to trigger the security system and can display pre-

defined messages from the monitoring office such as “RECREATION EVENTS ON MONDAY”. Several PANIC

buttons are configured on the lighting control panels, in addition to the RF pendant worn by each

occupant. When these buttons are pressed, the PANIC alarm alerts the monitoring office in addition to

illuminating all the lights in the unit. Furthermore, all the electrical appliances are switched off to

prevent the possibility of electrical fires.

the equipment

the system in operation

The lighting control panels mounted in each of the areas in the unit provide control for the lighting

groups and other related equipment in each immediate area. The touchscreens are capable of

controlling every area around the home from the one location.

A DDNP1501 network power supply can be used to supplement the network, as user interface requires

power that supplied to the network by the load controllers could be exceeded, due to the presence of

the Philips Dynalite touchscreen.


All blinds are connected to the DDRC810DT-GL in the following manner.

Any of the lighting control panels can be programmed to drive individual blinds or groups of blinds either

up or down from a single button press.

Floor heating is controlled by connecting the power directly to the output of the DDRC820FR due to the

high currents associated with these appliances. The Philips Dynalite system can then activate the floor

heating elements at programmed times. When the floor-heating element is active the temperature is

then monitored by the DTS900. This equipment is connected in the following way.

The water valves are connected to the DDRC810DT-GL in addition to feedback from the third party water

level sensor through the AUX input of this same device. The sensor used in this installation provides a

contact closure upon detecting pre-defined water levels.

N/OC N/C

DownUp

M

Do

wn

Up

Ne

utra

l Earth

240V Motor

Supply

C N/O N/C

Twin &

Earth

D+

SH

LD

GN

D

+15v

D-

AU

X

C

N/O

N/C

N/O

N/C

C

Micro

Processor

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Step

Down

TRX

240V Control

Supply

Relay Coils


The third-party water temperature sensor is connected to another DDMC802‟s AUX input and is also

programmed to control the water valve in the same way as above. As all the devices are connected to

the same network, features can be triggered from any of the controllers.

A security system can be interfaced to Philips Dynalite through a dry contact closure to trigger the

required response from the lighting control system. Upon the ALARM or PANIC event, the security system

provides the Philips Dynalite system with a contact closure via one of the AUX inputs as described above.

This action then flags this event to the monitoring station and turns on all of the lights in the unit if

required.


Lights

Blinds

PANIC

Balcony

This same activity can be also be triggered from a lighting control panel that incorporates a programmed

PANIC button. This button can be programmed so that it must be pressed for at least three seconds to

avoid inadvertent or accidental triggers. When activated it signals the duress alarm to the security

system and/or the nurse call system by breaking the normally closed dry contact input, as shown above.

The Philips Dynalite touchscreen can control all the equipment connected to the Philips Dynalite system.

It does this by displaying simple pages of controls to the homeowner as shown below.

The Philips Dynalite lighting control panels throughout the unit are programmed to do more than

activate lights On and Off. Panels in main living areas such as the living/family room have the ability to

control blinds and the Nurse Call system. A typical display on the touchscreen is as follows.

The first button on this panel dims the lights in the room up and down. By

pressing and holding the button, this will cause the lights within the area to

dim up or down. The Blinds button will operate the blinds in that room in a

sequence of presses. The first press will raise the blinds, the second press

will stop the blinds and the third press will lower the blinds, in that order.

The PANIC button flags a call both to the Nurse Call system and security

system simultaneously. The Balcony button activates the lights on the

balcony. All button functions are completely configurable to suit the

required needs of the facility.

load controllers

One of the controllers used in this example project is the DDMC802GL. This

channels of this unit can be individually fitted with a range of different module types to suit the control

requirements. The following table details the different control modules used. This load schedule also

outlines all the devices found in the distribution board.


The DDMC802 mixed controller is used for dimming the lamps within the unit. One controller (Box 1) has

been fitted with a four-channel relay module (LSRM402 4 x 2A) and a four-channel leading edge dimming

module (LSDM402 4 x 2A). Further dimming controllers could be fitted with 2 x LSDM402 modules if there

was a requirement for more control channels.

The DDRC810DT-GL is used to switch Extra Low Voltage (ELV) loads such as the water valve solenoid

that‟s usually powered by a 24VDC power supply. ELV loads must never be switched on this same device

when switching 240VAC loads.

The DDRC820FR unit is a relay device used to switch the heavy control loads such a floor heating.

load schedule Load Controller Cct

Capacity Drawing Designator

Fixture Qty Load

DDMC802 Box 1 C1 240W D1 LV Downlight 50W 3 150W*

DDMC802 Box 1 C2 240W D2 LV Downlight 50W 4 200W



DDMC802 Box 1 C5 240W R1 T5 Linear fluorescent 18W 1 18W

DDMC802 Box 1 C6 240W R2 Incandescent uplight 50W 1 50W

DDMC802 Box 1 C7 240W

DDMC802 Box 1 C8 240W

DDRC810DT Box 2 C1 240W R3 Blind motor 1 500W






DDRC810DT Box 2 C7 240W


DDRC810DT Box 3 C1 2400W R12 ELV water solenoid 1 500W

DDRC810DT Box 3 C2 2400W Air Conditioning ELV Dry contact 1 500W







DDRC820FR Box 4 C1 4800W R9 Floor heating 1 4800W



DDRC820FR Box 4 C4 4800W




*The maximum load current for any DDMC802 output is 2A. Each controller base/motherboard the total

load current should not exceed 10A and it is strongly recommended that each such controller be

protected with its own dedicated circuit breaker.

2011 Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited (ABN 97 095 929 829). All rights reserved. Not to be reproduced without permission. Dynalite, DyNet,

DLight and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd.

application guide apartment

Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Apartment Page 1 of 5

This application guide contains information on:

Designing a lighting control system for a residence within a multi-dwelling environment

Basic lighting control functionality

Integration with access control

Considerations for common area lighting

From an aesthetic and lifestyle perspective, lighting control allows the homeowner to present their

residence in the best possible light, creating a scene to suit any occasion; from intimate late-night

dining, celebratory drinks with friends, to quietly reading a book on a rainy Sunday afternoon – no two

moods are the same.

A lighting control system can produce advantage on a practical & environmental level, one of the major

features that can be built into a lighting control system for residential application is that lights can be

automatically set to dimmed when turned on to 95% rather than 100% without any discernable difference

to the human eye. The immediate benefit is a significant saving from extending the lamp life from two

to three times.

This document describes basic lighting control system design for an apartment in a multi-dwelling

development. It also incorporates general notes on integration with a keyless access system and lighting

in the common areas of the building. For further information on home automation or to learn more

about integration with other services in a residential environment, see Philips Dynalite Application Design

Guide – The Luxury Home.

typical layout

Page 2 of 5 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Apartment

system outline All of the main areas of the apartment; living, dining, master bed and bathroom, have dimmed lighting

circuits. Light fittings within each of the lighting groups are low, as smaller groups allow for more

effective and efficient lighting design to create the perfect scene.

In addition to dimming in the main living areas, on/off controlled lighting is applied in utility areas such

as the laundry. The bathroom exhaust fan shares a circuit with a linear fluorescent fitting, ensuring it

does not remain on when lighting has been turned off and the bathroom unoccupied.

A basic design with small lighting loads is particularly well suited to the use of the economical Philips

Dynalite DIN series controllers, which occupy a smaller footprint than traditional wall-mounted dimmers.

This series of dimmers is designed for installation into a switchboard, next to the circuit breaker that is

supplying power to the controlled lighting circuit.

Lighting control panels are positioned in convenient locations throughout the apartment, providing the

occupant with many different options to change and adjust the control system. Each can be fitted with

an infrared receiver, which allows the use of hand-held remote controls to activate any of the stored

presets, removing the need for physical contact with the panel.

In the common areas outside the apartment, hallway lighting is being controlled via motion sensors

located adjacent to the elevator and fire exit on each level of the building. The access control system is

integrated to both the common area lighting and the individual apartment lighting control system,

meaning local apartment settings can be altered even before the occupant reaches the front door.

Simply accessing the building‟s elevator or even the main entry of the apartment complex can trigger the

lighting within the apartment itself.

the equipment



control panels

Lighting control panels located around the apartment generally provide local control of lighting groups in

the immediate area. Buttons can be programmed to execute „one-touch press and hold‟ for fading the

light level or toggle functionality, for „ON‟ to „OFF‟.

The building‟s access control system is connected to the lighting control system in the apartment via the

auxiliary (AUX) input in one of the load controllers. It places the apartment into a „WELCOME‟ setting

when activated which, at its most basic level, would typically switch on the apartments entry lighting,

allowing the owner to return to the apartment safely and to create an inviting environment. Once inside,

using the “WELCOME” mode from a pushbutton panel can be used for setting entry, kitchen & dining

levels to 70% and master bedroom & living to 80%, for example.

This panel typically performs control functions for immediate areas and features

custom engraving detail to clearly identify each button function. In addition to

the „Welcome‟ setting, some examples of illustrated functionality on CP6;

ALL ON

All lights in the area come on to full, providing total illumination when

required, including in times of duress or emergency.

AWAY All lights are dimmed to „off‟ over 10 minutes. Subsequently, a

random sequence of varying light levels is activated in the living areas

of the house, giving the illusion of occupancy & providing a

preventative security measure when the house is unoccupied.

Lighting control panels CP1 and CP2 (left) are located bedside in the master

bedroom and provide the user with global control functions. For instance, the

„GOODNIGHT‟ preset could turn off all house lights over a period of one or two

minutes, ensuring that no lights are left on overnight, while giving other members

of the house time to get to bed before lights reach 0%. The „PATH‟ preset

illuminates a pathway from bedroom to bathroom that varies depending on the time

of day from the use of a network timer clock. For example, when this preset is used

between 10pm and 6am, ceiling lights in the bathroom turn on to 40% ensuring that

a late-night visit to the bathroom, does not disrupt sleeping members of the

household. At all other times, both ceiling and vanity lights are turned on to 90% and

100% respectively, providing near-full illuminance for clear visibility.

Lighting control panels in the remaining areas around the apartment are similarly configured to provide

both ambiance and functionality. For example, in the toddler‟s bedroom, a button is programmed to dim

lights down to „off‟ over a one-hour period. This is achieved with a staggered approach; first dimming

LAMP

GOODNIGHT

LIGHTS

PATH

BALCONY

CP6

CP1-CP2

ENTRY

AWAYWELCOME

BALCONY

LIVING

DINING

ALL ON

MEDIA

KITCHEN

HALL

Page 4 of 5 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Apartment

the lights in the bedroom down to 40% over two seconds, then to 20% over 20 minutes and finally to off,

over the remaining 40 minutes.

load controllers

Apartment-wide lighting control in this scenario is achieved using 2 x DDMC802 Multipurpose Controllers.

These controllers allows for each of the channels to be fitted with different styles of module control to

suit the requirement of the user and their apartment. The first (Box #1), contains two 4 x 2A dimming

module cards (LSDM402), for control of the low voltage incandescent fittings contained throughout the

living areas.

The second DDMC802 (Box #2) has been fitted with a 4 x 2A relay module card (LSRM402) for switched

on/off control of lighting in utility areas; bathroom, laundry and courtyard. A vacant slot in Box #2 has

been allowed for future requirement, provisioning for an additional four channels of dimming, relay or

fan control at a later stage, should the homeowner desire.

Integration with the building access control system is easily achieved through a dry contact output

connected to the AUX input of any Philips Dynalite controller; in this case, either of the two DDMC802

Multipurpose Controllers being employed. By adding a network timer clock DDTC001, can provide time-

based event control such as programming bedroom lights to turn on at 7:00am each day, Monday through

to Friday.

The DDNP1501 Network Power Supply (Box#3) is used to supplement power being provided to the network

by the load controllers (about 50mA per DDMC802) for the user interface such as pushbutton panels and

timer clocks. It is commonly used in situations where there are only a few load controllers with many

control panels required.

load schedule

Load Controller Cct Capacity Drawing Designator Fixture Qty Load

DDMC802 Box 1 Ch1 240W* D1 LV Downlight 50W 5 250W

DDMC802 Box 1 Ch2 240W D2 LV Downlight 50W 4 200W







DDMC802 Box 2 Ch1 240W R1 Incandescent 60W 1 60W

DDMC802 Box 2 Ch2 240W R2 Linear fluorescent 18W T5 1 18W

DDMC802 Box 2 Ch3 240W R3 CFL 15W 1 15W

DDMC802 Box 2 Ch4 240W Future capacity


DDMC802 Box 2 Ch5

Future expansion slot for further plug-in module DDMC802 Box 2 Ch6

DDMC802 Box 2 Ch7

DDMC802 Box 2 Ch8

*The maximum load current for any one DDMC802 output is 2A. Each plug-in module, such as the LSDM402, should

never exceed a 5A total load. Where 2 x LSDM402 modules are used with a DDMC802 controller base/motherboard,

the total load current should not exceed 10A. It is strongly recommended that each such controller be protected

with a dedicated circuit breaker.



application guide boardroom

Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Boardroom Page 1 of 4


Control of workspace and decorative lighting

Control of a data projector via RS232

Control of audio-visual equipment via infrared (IR)

Control of a projection screen

Control of window curtains

Infrared (IR) remote control

Integration with a room booking calendar via the office Ethernet LAN

The boardroom is often the centrepiece of a workplace, communicating an overall image of the

company. During corporate presentations, precisely co-ordinated control of lighting, audio-visual

systems and other devices, such as motorised blinds and curtains, is vital. Boardrooms and meeting

rooms are often used for corporate hospitality, so it is desirable for a control system to accommodate

entertaining.

typical layout

Circuit 1

Circuit 2

Circuit 8

Circuit 4

Circuit 6Circuit 5

CP1 CP2

S1 S2

CP3

Circuit 3

Circuit 7

M1

M2

M3 M4 M5

M6

LEGEND

Incandescent Lamp

Bi-directional Motor

Cold Cathode Neon

User Control Panel

Multifunction Sensor

CP3

S2

system outline

The boardroom includes a cabinet that houses audio-visual equipment. A ceiling-mounted data projector

casts images on to a motorised screen, which is retracted when not in use to provide access to a

whiteboard.

Page 2 of 4 Philips Dynalite Application Guide - Boardroom

Within the area, different lighting groups are used individually or collectively to achieve certain scenes

that best suit the current use of the boardroom. Lighting over the audio-visual cabinet (circuit 1) and the

boardroom table (circuits 5 & 6) comprises narrow beam low voltage downlights, which enables precise

illumination over work areas. Downlights (circuits 2 & 3) are also used for general room lighting (circuits

2 & 3) and cold cathode neon, concealed in a ceiling coffer, provides perimeter lighting around the table

(circuit 4). Separate control of circuit 2 allows fittings near the screen to be dimmed when the

projector is being used.

Control panels are located adjacent to the entry doors (CP1 & CP2) and to the left of the whiteboard

(CP3). An infrared remote provides control for those seated at the boardroom table. Ceiling mounted

sensors (S1 & S2) pick up signals from the IR remote.

Each of the five windows is fitted with motorised curtain track to reduce natural light levels during

projector operation. Two control channels are used per curtain; one for direction of travel and the

other for motion. This enables partial closure of the curtains and de-energises the motors at the end of

travel so that motor limit switches are not relied upon constantly. The figure below illustrates the

motor control circuit.

ML

N

CH1 CH2 UP

DOWN

the equipment

Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Boardroom Page 3 of 4

the system in operation control panels

CP1 and CP2 are located next to the entry doors and provide control over lighting and curtains. CP3 is

located to the left of the whiteboard and has the same functionality as CP1 and CP2, with an additional

eight buttons for controlling the audio-visual system. Meeting members seated at the table use an IR

remote for control of lighting and other devices, as does the standing presenter.

sensors

Philips Dynalite DUS804C 360° universal sensors incorporate motion detect, infrared receiver and natural

light level detection capability (in this application the light level function would not be used). The

motion detect function is used to turn lighting off after a predetermined period of no activity, ensuring

that lights are not left on unnecessarily in an empty room and to notify the building management system

(BMS) that the room is no longer occupied. The IR receive function can be used to recall preset scenes

by a roving presenter with the hand-held remote.

gateways to other systems

AV equipment

Many popular AV system vendors have developed software integration tools that enable direct network

integration to the Dynalite system. Connection to the DyNet network is generally achieved using a

DTK622 connected to an RS232 port on the AV system. This support enables control objects within the

AV system, such as buttons and sliders, to be configured so they directly control and monitor functions

within the Philips Dynalite system. This also allows command to be sent from the AV system to the

lighting control system if required.

Where direct control of AV equipment is required from the Philips Dynalite system, integration to audio-

visual equipment can be implemented using a DIRTX8 Infrared Transmitter. This is a convenient and cost

effective method of integration, as most commercial and domestic AV products are supplied with an IR

port. The DIRTX8 has eight outputs, more than meeting the requirements of a typical application. It is

capable of replaying ‘macros’ of IR commands with appropriate delays and conditional logic in between

each step of the macro. In addition to the supplied library of IR commands, the DIRTX8 has an inbuilt

learner to record IR commands.

data projector

Control of the data projector is implemented using a DMNG232 Network Gateway configured to ASCII

mode. This allows bi-directional communication with the projector using text, via an RS232 port. Other

methods of interfacing include using a DIRTX8 infrared transmitter for projectors that are IR enabled.

Page 4 of 4 Philips Dynalite Application Guide - Boardroom

LAN services

EnvisionManager provides a DCOM integration platform that enables connectivity over TCP/IP across an

office or commercial LAN. With this approach the Philips Dynalite system can be readily controlled from

any PC installed on the LAN, using intranet web pages, or a range of software utilities available from

Philips Dynalite.

It also enables popular applications from Microsoft and many other software vendors to directly control

the system. An example may involve a reservation system within Microsoft Outlook or Lotus Notes that

sets a boardroom into an appropriate mode prior to a scheduled meeting.

load controllers

Two DLE405 4 x 5A dimmers provide eight channels of leading edge dimming for downlights and cold

cathode neon. Control of curtain motors and the projection screen is achieved using two DRC810DT-GL 8

x 10A relay controllers. The DRC810DT-GL employs dry contact changeover outputs, which are

particularly suitable for control of curtain motors.

load schedule

Load Controller Cct Capacity Drawing Designator Fixture Qty Load

DLE405 Box 1 C1 1200W Circuit 1 LV Downlight 50W 3 150W

DLE405 Box 1 C2 1200W Circuit 2 Downlight 100W 3 300W


DLE405 Box 1 C4 1200W Circuit 4 Cold Cathode Neon 1 600W





DRC810DT Box 3 C1 2400W M1 M1 curtain movement 1 25W

DRC810DT Box 3 C2 2400W M1 M1 curtain direction











DRC810DT Box 4 C5 2400W Spare





DLight and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd. Microsoft Outlook is the registered trademark of

Microsoft Corporation. Lotus Notes is the registered trademark of Lotus Development Corporation.

application guide hotel ballroom

Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Hotel Ballroom Page 1 of 4


DMX512 control of lighting in addition to ‘in-house’ control

Automatic room join functions when a space is changed by movable walls

Providing a locking mechanism for control panels in public spaces

The appearance of the ballroom is a major selling feature of a hotel. The lighting control system should

present the room in the best possible light. A ballroom generally accommodates a variety of operating

modes and hotel staff need to be able to quickly and easily reconfigure the room between functions, to

meet the differing needs of each client. To achieve this aim, the lighting designer would set up the

preset scenes for all likely applications and room combinations in advance.

Occasionally, stage sets, catwalks and other temporary equipment will be erected in the space, often

positioned in front of lighting control points, which makes it imperative to provide duplicate control

points in several locations and ‘smart’ sockets for portable control stations. The control system must be

flexible enough to allow third-party access for DMX512 theatrical control signals. For this to be

practical, the system must support ‘locking out’ of DMX control of emergency exits and other critical

areas.

As well as the requirement for flexibility and repeatability of lighting settings, the room must be as

energy-efficient as possible when not in use. To effectively render the colours in the room, decorative

light fittings and chandeliers typically utilise energy-hungry incandescent lamps. These have a short life

span and are often difficult to access, but are necessary to create the atmosphere that guests expect.

The control system should restrict use of expensive-to-operate lamps during times when only hotel staff

is present and use of expensive ‘public’ lighting should only be permitted by authorised persons.

typical layout

CP1

CP2

CP3

TS1 TS2 TS3

CP4 CP5 CP6

Pre Function Room

Service Corridor

Room A Room B Room C

Removable

WallRemovable

Wall

DMX2DMX1 DMX3SW1 SW2

Page 2 of 4 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Hotel Ballroom

system outline room joining

The ballroom has a pre-function area and two removable walls, which partition the main area into any

one of four combinations;

All partitions open: A + B + C

All partitions closed: A | B| C

Zone A as an area with B + C as a second area

Zone C as an area with A + B as a second area

For each of these four combinations, there may be several room ‘modes of operation’. Examples could

be ‘cocktail party’, ‘banquet’, ‘AV presentation’ and ‘dinner dance’. A preset such as ‘All On’ will vary

dramatically from one mode to another. For example, wall washers illuminating removable walls in one

setting would be a source of glare in another where the walls were removed. As a result, allowing for as

few as eight presets per combination, per mode, there is a requirement for over one hundred presets.

The system has automatic room join functions in the form of magnetic proximity switches mounted on

de-mountable partition tracks. These switches are connected to a dry contact interface unit (Dynalite

DDMIDC8) that automatically detects the presence or absence of removable walls. This unit then

configures the local control panels and the set of presets they use to suit the current status. This means

that with all of the partitions closed, each control panel would only control the lighting within that

space and if a partition were to be opened between two rooms, each of the local control panels would

work in parallel and control all of the lighting within the enlarged space. Similarly, if all partitions were

open, all control panels would work in parallel and control all of the lighting. Provision is made to

override the automatic partition status, which can be useful if one of the partitions is only partially in

place, such as when a buffet area is required during a conference.

DMX512 control

The casual use of theatrical lighting desks is enabled through the provision of dual port load controllers.

This allows a separate control network for DMX512 signals, while still allowing the use of the main

control system. The touchscreens provided have a password protected section that allows the selection

of the circuits for which DMX512 control is allowed. It is also possible to only allow partial control of a

circuit via DMX512, in the form of setting a ‘low limit’, which is useful for allowing partial control of

critical circuits such as egress lighting, but never allowing these circuits to be switched off or be dimmed

to an unacceptably low level.

Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Hotel Ballroom Page 3 of 4

the equipment

TS1 TS2

DLE1210

CH12

CH11

CH10

CH9

CH8

CH7

CH6

CH5

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

3 Phase

40 AMP

DLE1210

CH12

CH11

CH10

CH9

CH8

CH7

CH6

CH5

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

3 Phase

40 AMP

DLE1210

CH12

CH11

CH10

CH9

CH8

CH7

CH6

CH5

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

3 Phase

40 AMP

DLE1210

CH12

CH11

CH10

CH9

CH8

CH7

CH6

CH5

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

3 Phase

40 AMP

To other Load

Controllers

as required

DyNet

DMX512

DyNet

DMX512

DyNet

DMX512

CP6

Unlock

Lock

Network

TS3CP5CP4

Unlock

Lock

Network

CP3

Unlock

Lock

Network

CP2

Unlock

Lock

Network

CP1

Unlock

Lock

Network

DDMIDC8

SW2SW1

Unlock

Lock

Network

DMX Input

Room A

DMX Input

Room B

DMX Input

Room C

DMX512

Patch

Panel

DMX512

Output


control panels

CP1-CP6 provide preset recall buttons, as well as some additional features.

A key-switch allows the panel to be ‘locked out’, to prevent unauthorised

use. This is particularly important in a ballroom environment, where correct

placement of control panels often dictates that they will be in locations

accessible to the public. The control panels may also be remotely locked or

unlocked via a utility page on the touchscreens. A network socket is

included on each panel to allow easy connection of portable control panels

and hand-held programming units.

load controllers

The types and quantities of load controller required will vary substantially, depending on the size of the

ballroom and types of loads. Because of this, only a small example of load controllers has been included

in the system drawing. An important feature of the specified load controllers is that they incorporate

two serial ports, one for carrying the DyNet signal and the other for connection to a separate DMX512

network. The DyNet network can be used to provide ‘on-the-fly’ configuration of DMX features, via a

DMX utility page on the touchscreen.

1

2

3

4

OFF

CLEANER

Unlock

Lock

Network

CP1-CP6

Page 4 of 4 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Hotel Ballroom

touchscreens

TS1-TS3 provide preset recall options similar to other control panels, as well as other control and set-up

options including;

Manual control of each circuit using an on-screen fader

Reprogram the presets that are recalled from the other control panels

Remotely lock and unlock the other control panels

Set DMX control options

Override the state of the automatic room join system

Operate the lighting in other rooms, as well as it’s own room

Set timed events

Sample touch screen pages – incorporate logos, set security levels, preset control, scene editing, room join and lockout features

2011 Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited (ABN 97 095 929 829). All rights reserved. Not to be reproduced without permission. Dynalite, DyNet, DLight and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd.

application guide lecture theatre

Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Lecture Theatre Page 1 of 5


Control of workspace and presentation lighting

Control of a data projector via RS232

Control of audio equipment via infrared (IR)

Integration with a building management system (BMS) using the LON protocol

Occupancy sensing

Infrared (IR) remote control

In a lecture theatre, a flexible control system is an essential part of the lighting. Lecture theatres need

to accommodate a wide range of uses and as a result, the demands on the lighting control system in this

type of application are surprisingly complex. The control system must maintain the most comfortable

lighting levels for a wide range of tasks, adapt to a number of room combinations, provide for safe

egress in case of an emergency, interface with other systems such as AV and BMS and of course, maintain

the aesthetics of the room and present the best possible appearance at all times.

Users often leave lights on when vacating the space, so it is desirable for the control system to turn off

lighting when the room is unoccupied. In a university or similar environment, there is often a BMS

responsible for access control and HVAC. To optimise running cost and reduce energy consumption, the

lighting control system should notify the BMS if the room is not in use and the airconditioning not

required.

typical layout

Circuit 1

Circuit 2

Circuit 4Circuit 3 Circuit 5

Circuit 7

Circuit 7

Circuit

6

Circuit 9

Circuits

10, 11, 12

Circuit 8Circuit 8

Circuit 8 Circuit 8

CP2

CP1

CP3

CP6

TS1

TS2

CP4

CP5

S1

S4

S2

S5

S3

S6

LEGEND

Incandescent LV

Track Lighting

Fluorescent Luminaire

Touch Screen

Control Panel

TS1

CP2

Page 2 of 5 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Lecture Theatre

system outline The lecture theatre would typically incorporate a projection room where data, video and other audio-

visual equipment would be housed. The lighting within the projection room (circuits 1 & 2) comprises

narrow beam downlights, which prevents distracting light spills into the lecture theatre during

presentations.

Within the body of the lecture theatre, the primary lighting would be provided by recessed fluorescent

luminaires (circuits 3, 4 & 5) fitted with electronic dimmable ballasts. There are a number of types of

dimmable ballasts including 2-Wire, 1-10V, DSI & DALI. Philips Dynalite controllers support all of these

control methods. In this case, DSI ballasts are used, as the individual control capability of DALI ballasts

is not needed. Control of the fluorescent luminaires is divided into three circuits to cater for the

theatre being occupied by varying group sizes and to allow for delivery of even levels of light to the

seating if the ceiling is raked.

There are a number of incandescent low voltage circuits in this design; downlights (circuits 6, 7 & 8)

provide safe lighting levels for walkways and doorways. Separate control of the podium area downlights

(circuit 9) allows for either AV projections or whiteboard presentations. Track spotlights (circuits 10, 11

& 12) allow for tightly controlled lighting of the presenter at a variety of lectern positions.

Sensors (S1-S6) are placed over podium and seating areas to receive signals from a hand-held infrared

remote control and to notify the control system when the space is unoccupied.

the equipment


the system in operation lectern touchscreens The lectern touchscreens allow complete control of the system. The panel allows selection of the preset

lighting scenes, which have been programmed using CP2, as well as individual control of each circuit.

The system will be configured to ‘know’ which of the lectern positions is in use and dim up the

appropriate channel of track lighting. The touchscreen’s main menu allows navigation to three sections;

Lighting, Audio & Video, as well as preset scenes that provide operation of all three services from a

single action, eg a ‘play DVD’ button would simultaneously; dim the lighting, turn on the projector and

select the DVD player as the source, configure the audio routing system to use the DVD player as the

source and select the main speakers at the front of the room at a default volume level and play the

currently loaded DVD.

Sample Touchscreen Pages

control panels

CP1 is located next to the door in the projection room and controls the lighting

within the room. It selects the various preset levels needed for both set-up and

operation of the room. ‘UP’ and ‘DOWN’ keys allow fine adjustment. An

additional button manually selects ‘ALL OFF’, which switches all lights off in the

control room and in the lecture theatre, as well as triggering a transmission to

the BMS, which indicates that the room is no longer in use. A panic reset button

resets the panic condition on CP3-CP6.

HIGH

MED

LOW

OFF

ALL

OFF

PANIC

RESET

CP1

Page 4 of 5 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Lecture Theatre

1

2

3

4 MANUAL

CP2

CP2 is located in the projection room and

controls the lighting in the lecture theatre.

It includes manual slider controls and

provides one of the various methods by which

preset scenes can be programmed in Philips

Dynalite systems, having the ability to both

program and recall presets. The preset

scenes are recalled from TS1 and TS2 touchscreens at the two lectern positions in the front of the room.

This panel includes a manual slider fader for each lighting circuit. This type of panel provides a very

simple method for non-technical users to set up lighting presets. The slider faders also provide for ‘live’

adjustment of individual circuits. To program a preset, the operator first presses the ‘MANUAL’ button,

adjusts the slider faders until the desired lighting settings are achieved and the presses and holds down

the preset button to which the new settings are to be saved. Philips Dynalite call this programming

method ‘hold-down programming’. Alternative methods for programming presets include PC software,

LCD touchscreens, pushbutton programming panels and plug-in portable programmers.

CP3-CP6 are installed adjacent to lecture theatre doors. They have

two buttons, one to select the ‘ON’ preset and the other to select the

‘OFF’ preset. From these control panels, the ON scene would have a

relatively fast fade time, say three seconds. However, the fade time

for the OFF scene would be in the region of 15-20 seconds, ensuring that

the person operating the control panel has adequate time to leave the

room before the lighting fades out. All four of these control panels

would work in parallel and all would include panic switches. To reset

the panic condition, a ‘RESET PANIC’ switch is provided on CP1.

sensors

Dynalite DUS804C 360° universal sensors incorporate motion detect, infrared receiver and PE cell

capability (in this application the PE function would not be used). The motion detect function is used to

turn lighting off after a predetermined period of no activity, ensuring that lights are not left on

unnecessarily and to notify the BMS that the room is no longer occupied. The IR receive function is used

to recall preset scenes by a roving presenter with the hand-held remote.

gateways to other systems data projector

Control of the data projector is implemented using a DNG232 Network Gateway configured to ASCII

mode. This allows bi-directional communication with the projector using text, via an RS232 port. Other

methods of interfacing include using a DIRTX8 infrared transmitter for projectors that are IR enabled.

Emergency

Use Only

ON

OFF

CP3-CP6


audio controller

Integration to audio equipment is implemented using a DIRTX8 Infrared Transmitter. This is a convenient

and cost effective method of integration as most commercial and domestic AV products are supplied

with an IR port. The DIRTX8 has eight outputs, more than meeting the requirements of a typical

application. It is capable of replaying ‘macros’ of IR commands with appropriate delays and conditional

logic in between each step of the macro. In addition to the supplied library of IR commands, the DIRTX8

has an inbuilt learner to record IR commands.

Other methods of interfacing with audio controllers include using a DNG232 Network Gateway for

equipment that has an RS232 port. Some AV controllers have an RS485 port, which allows direct

connection to the Philips Dynalite RS485 network. Most leading AV control systems include libraries that

enable control of Philips Dynalite systems.

building management system

Integration with the BMS is achieved with the DDNI-LON Network Interface. This device translates Philips

Dynalite’s DyNet protocol to LON protocol, using the standard lighting SNVTs (standard network variable

type). Whenever the door entry panels are used to switch the lights on, or the motion sensors detect

motion or any absence of motion, the DDNI-LON notifies the BMS, which in turn sets the airconditioning

to the appropriate state. There are several other common methods of interfacing with a BMS, ranging

from simple interfaces such as dry contact closures, to high-level interfaces, such as DCOM over TCP/IP.

load controllers

The controllers are a DBC410 (4 x 10A ballast controller) and DLE1205 (12 x 5A leading edge dimmer).

For this installation, controllers with individual circuit breakers on each circuit have been selected. This

is to allow for simplified connection and testing of emergency lighting systems (see separate Technical

Guide: Emergency Lighting).

load schedule Load Controller Cct Capacity Drawing Designator Fixture Qty Load







DLE1205 Box 1 C7 1200W Circuit 10 Track



DLE1205 Box 1 C10 1200W Spare



DBC410 Box 2 C1 2400W Circuit 3 Fluorescent 2 x 36W 6 432W



DBC410 Box 2 C4 2400W Spare


DLight and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd. LON is the registered trademark of Echelon Corporation.

application guide luxury home

Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Luxury Home Page 1 of 11


Basic lighting control functionality

Integration with airconditioning

Integration with security systems

Integration with audio-visual systems

Control of equipment such as blinds, ceiling fans, louvres, irrigation systems and floor heating

Remote control through hand-held control units, the Internet or over the telephone

The typical smart home comprises several integrated systems transparently working together to provide

convenience and security to the homeowner. Some of the resulting functionality includes:

Different lighting scenes and moods such as WELCOME, GOODBYE or GOODNIGHT that can be

activated from any keypad, wired or wireless touchscreen or remote control

Control of many different styles of lighting sources such as LED, incandescent or fluorescent

lamps, from the push of one button.

Control of lighting, music and airconditioning on the same lighting control keypad

The drawing of blinds and extinguishing of lights to occur when the security system is armed

The activation of lights and music to welcoming levels in desired areas, when the security system

is disarmed

The activation of key internal lights, blinds opened and keypads frozen while the external lights

flash on and off to attract attention, if the PANIC button is pressed or the security system is

triggered

Different profile actions to occur when the security system is disarmed by different members of

the family

The home to appear occupied when nobody’s present through the activation of lights and other

equipment at different times of the day or at random

Floor heating, irrigation systems and pool plant, garage doors, ceiling and exhaust fans, heated

towel rails or external louvers to be integrated together with the lighting control, so that it will

automatically be turned on/off through timer control or from one lighting control panel.

Monitoring the home through cameras over the Internet

Activation of all egress pathways when smoke sensors have been tripped in addition to initiating

the PANIC alarm on the security system

Allowing irrigation systems to operate only when the soil is too dry, regardless of any ongoing

timer program

Turning lights on when presence is detected and turning them off after a nominated time of no

presence

Cinema style control in the Home Theatre room when the MOVIE button is selected: sequential

activation of the projector, dimming the lights over time, drawing open the drapes as the

projector screen lowers into position and selecting the appropriate movie title or sound track on

the DVD player

Page 2 of 11 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Luxury Home

The Philips Dynalite control system interfaces to the above equipment through common integration such

as RS232, RS485, Infra Red and TCP/IP (Ethernet) through the DMNG232, DNG485, DIRTX8 and DNG100BT

network gateways, respectively. Simple equipment such as floor heating, irrigation solenoids and

airconditioning are usually controlled through relay or contact closure respectively.

typical layout

Lower Ground Floor

Ground Floor

First Floor


system outline

All the main living areas such as the Living, Dining, Bedrooms and Bathrooms have dimmed lighting. Light

fitting numbers are kept low (around 5-6 low-voltage down lights per group of lights). Smaller groups

allow for more effective and efficient lighting design and control (i.e. D1, D2 etc), in addition to

facilitating the use of the DIN series controllers. The Philips Dynalite DIN series controllers occupy a

smaller footprint and require less real estate in distribution boards. The home’s distribution boards can

be found on the ground floor and the first floor, in well-ventilated areas. This is done to minimise cable

runs. On-Off lighting control is applied in utility areas such as the Laundry Storeroom and Garage (i.e.

R1, R2 etc.) as they do not require dimming of the lighting. Lighting control panels are placed in each

room (i.e. CP1, CP2 and CP12). These panels allow the homeowner control for such functions as “PANIC”

and “GOODNIGHT”. Other panels such as those by the front door (CP6) allow system wide presets such as

“GOODBYE” and “AWAY”. The latter preset emulates occupancy when nobody’s home - as a preventative

security measure. The home also has LED lamps in the stairwell and pool areas for color changing effects

and general mood setting.

In addition to fundamental lighting, the Philips Dynalite system also controls other equipment such the

ceiling fan in the master bedroom, bathroom run-on exhaust fans, garage doors, blinds and external

louvers. The timers within the Philips Dynalite system allow periodic operation of pool cleaners, floor

heating and heated towel rails. Sensors in the bathrooms activate lights when someone enters the space

then turn everything off after a nominated period of vacancy, including any heat lamps or exhaust fans

that were left running. Nominated sensors determine the amount of light present in the home and

control the external louvers and blinds to ease the burden on the airconditioning system.

The Philips Dynalite control system also interfaces to the security system so that all the internal lights

are activated upon alarm or duress and all external lights flash periodically to attract attention from

passers-by. Furthermore, all controlled blinds and louvers are opened allowing greater visibility of the

inside of the home – from the outside. In addition to this, all internal lighting control panels are frozen –

preventing lights from being switched off. Strategically placed PANIC buttons are configured on the

lighting control panels. When pressed for a few seconds these allow the Philips Dynalite system to flag a

duress alarm to the security system. The Philips Dynalite security interface also allows personalised

settings to be applied throughout the home upon security system disarm by different family members.

For example, a family member will disarm the security system with their designated PIN code at the

front door location. A pathway of dimmed light illuminates the way to the first floor bedrooms (D11 at

80%, D7 at 80%, D12 at 95%, D27 and D28 at 80%). If the sensor in the bathroom detects that ample light

is present then only the staircase lights (D12 at 80%) are activated to minimise the use of energy and

exploit ambient daylight entering the home. At night, in addition to the above, the backyard lights (D18,

R15) are also activated to provide a greater sense of security and discourage any would be intruder. This

also allows the darkest corners of the home to be lit and inspected at a glance. The Philips Dynalite

system also communicates with the multi-room audio system, channeling their favorite music track to

the lounge and first floor sitting rooms only. The ducted airconditioning system is also instructed to


commence operation at a pre-programmed set point. Different set points are chosen for different times

of the year.

Upon arming the security system, the Philips Dynalite system immediately activates a “lived-in” profile

sequence of events. This activity activates lights and audio in different parts of the home, at nominated

(or random) times, making the home appear occupied from the outside.

The smoke sensors throughout the home are also interfaced to the Philips Dynalite control system. As

these sensors are physically interconnected, a trip on any one sensor necessarily trips all others, which in

turn also activates the PANIC scene as described above.

The irrigation solenoids are also controlled by Dynalite relays at different times of the day and different

seasons from the built-in 365-day timer. When the third party moisture sensor detects the presence of

adequate moisture in the soil, the timer program is overridden and the garden is not watered.

A third-party wireless touchscreen allows each family member complete control over the Philips Dynalite

system as does the Philips Dynalite wall touchscreen. These units typically offer Ethernet connectivity,

allowing their pages to be displayed not only in the home through a wireless router yet also over the

World Wide Web. Different control actions can be sent from these units such as control of light levels in

different rooms, audio source selection, timer programs for floor heating and irrigation systems. In

addition to this, web cameras can also be incorporated to allow viewing of different areas around the

home. Many of these audio control commands can be replicated on the same Philips Dynalite lighting

control keypads in each room in addition to airconditioning settings.

The home theatre room has audio-visual devices such as a DVD player, projector and audio

amplifier/receiver. The Philips Dynalite system can co-ordinate the operation of these devices through

the press of one MOVIE button on the lighting control keypad in that room. This will commence dimming

the lights (D2 to 5% over 30 seconds) to a low level. The projector screen is then controlled to lower into

position, behind the closed curtains (R3, R4). When the screen is in position, the curtains are controlled

to open (R5, R6). All along, the projector has been activated and warming up. As the curtains are drawn,

the opening credits and title of the selected movie appear on the lowered screen as the Philips Dynalite

system has instructed the DVD player to start playing its disc in addition to instructing the receiver to

channel the DVD source out into the speakers in that room. When the movie concludes, the homeowner

presses the END button either on the lighting control keypad or the wireless touchscreen to initiate a

reverse sequence of the above events. The third-party universal remote control can also be used to

achieve this and other functions as it too can execute similar functionality. All the Philips Dynalite

lighting control keypads and sensors are equipped with infrared receivers so that any sequence of codes

transmitted from the universal remote are received and acted upon in the same way as a button press.


the equipment (ground floor distribution board only)


The lighting control panels around the home provide control for the lighting groups and other relayed

equipment in each immediate area. The touchscreens are capable of controlling every area around the

home.

N/OC N/C

DownUp

M

Do

wn

Up

Ne

utra

l Earth

240V Motor

Supply

C N/O N/C

Twin &

Earth

D+

SH

LD

GN

D

+15v

D-

AU

X

C

N/O

N/C

N/O

N/C

C

Micro

Processor

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Step

Down

TRX

240V Control

Supply

Relay Coils


The DDNP1501 (Box#3) is utilised to supplement the network power supply, as the number of lighting

control panel power requirement exceeds that supplied to the network by the two load controllers

(Box#1 through to Box#8), due to the presence of the Philips Dynalite touchscreen.

All blinds and curtains are connected to the DDRC810DT-GL in the following manner.

Lighting control panels can be programmed to drive the blinds either up or down by manipulating the

outputs of the associated controller in the desired manner.

Floor heating is controlled by connecting the power directly to the output of the DDRC820FR due to the

high currents associated with these appliances. The Philips Dynalite system can then activate the floor

heating elements at programmed times. When the floor-heating element is active the temperature is

then controlled by its own specific thermostat. This equipment is connected in the following way.

Ceiling fans are controlled by Philips Dynalite through the DDMC801 controller, fitted with the LSFCM202

and connected in the following way.

Four levels of control are possible through the LSFCM202. Four lighting control panel buttons are

dedicated to the four settings HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW and OFF respectively.

The irrigation solenoids are connected to the DDRC810DT in addition to feedback from the third-party

moisture sensor through the AUX input of this same device. The third-party moisture sensor used in this

installation outputs a contact closure upon detecting pre-defined moisture levels.


Although the irrigation system will operate during programmed times, the moisture sensor input can

override this until such time that moisture levels drop.

The security system has been interfaced to Philips Dynalite through simple dry contact closure upon

different security events. Upon the ALARM situation, the security system provides the Philips Dynalite

system with a contact closure via one of the AUX inputs as described above. This action then triggers a

sequence events starting with activation of all the lights in the home. Immediately afterwards, all blinds

are drawn while the lighting control keypads are frozen.

This same activity can be also be triggered from a lighting control panel that incorporates a programmed

PANIC button. This button must be pressed for at least three seconds to avoid inadvertent or accidental

presses. When activated it signals a duress alarm to the security system by breaking the normally closed

dry contact input, as shown below.

Two types of airconditioning systems can be found in this home, ducted and split. Both systems typically

interface to the Dynalite control system through dry contact closure. The home has ducted air

conditioning throughout with separate split units in the living and master bedroom areas, although this is

not depicted in the diagrams above for simplicity. Both systems usually require add-on modules available

from the vendor. Connection occurs via the DDRC810DT-GL. One of these units can be found in both

distribution board and is used specifically for ELV switching only. Light control panels in the master

bedroom (CP20,21), bedrooms (CP16,17,14), living room (CP11) and sitting room (CP13) incorporate an


AC button which turns the airconditioning on and off at different set-points for different times of the day

and year.

Home theatre equipment is connected and controlled by the Philips Dynalite system both through the

DIRTX8 with infrared commands and through the DNG232 with serial RS232 commands in the manner

shown below.

Each of these devices is programmed to transmit the necessary codes in the appropriate sequence. For

example, the DMNG232 will first transmit the STANDBY code to the home theatre receiver. Subsequently

the commands to select the desired source (DVD) and zone are sent one after the other. In addition to

this, the volume is gradually increased to attain the true cinema experience. Simultaneously, the Philips

Dynalite control system has been dimming the lights (D2) over 30 seconds and lowering the projector

screen.

The wireless touchscreen can control all the equipment connected to the Philips Dynalite system. It does

this by displaying HTML pages of controls that reside on the DNG100BT web page server. These pages are

transmitted wirelessly throughout the home via the connected third-party wireless router. In addition to

this, several web cameras are also accessible from these pages and allow inspection of different areas

around the home both from within the home or on any web browser over the internet, through the

homeowner’s connection. The DMNG100BT translates Ethernet into DyNet and accordingly provides

Internet connectivity to the Dynalite control system. The DMNG100BT and wireless router connections

are depicted in the diagram below.


Off

CD

Air Con

Relax

Blinds

Tuner

iPod

The Philips Dynalite lighting control panels throughout the home are programmed to do more than

activate lights On and Off. Panels in main living areas such as the living/family room have the ability to

control lights, audio, blinds and airconditioning. This panel (CP11) is shown below.

The first button on the first column activates the Relax mood setting in this area. This setting entails

dimming the main lights to a lower level (D17,16 to 85% over 5 sec). If a different lighting level is desired

then the up and down arrow buttons can be pressed to either raise or lower the current light setting

respectively. In addition to this a preselected music track is channelled into the living room while the

blinds are drawn down. The Air Con button can start or stop the airconditioning in that area. According

to the time of year, different temperature presets are chosen automatically. The Blinds button, when

pressed, changes the function of the up and down arrow buttons to inch up or down the blinds. The

second button column allows the homeowner to select a music source for listening in the living room

through the multi-room audio system. The Off button extinguishes all volume and de-activates source

equipment. The third button column provides the transport controls for the audio selection. The buttons

are (in order): Play, Stop, Pause, Skip FWD, Skip REV, Fast FWD. The up and down arrow buttons on the

column, control the volume in the living room.

The engraving on each button is back-lit allowing the

homeowner to make the correct selection every time.

Furthermore, the LED indicators on each button can be

programmed to flash at different frequencies during

different activities such as Play, Blinds up and Blinds

down.


The bed side panels (CP20,21) allow control of lighting in the room and

surrounding areas. The Fan button toggles the ceiling fan between HIGH to

MEDIUM to LOW to OFF when pressed in succession. The LED indicator for

this button flashes intermittently, indicating that the cycle of fan control in

currently underway. The DNstairs button illuminates a dim path from the

master bedroom to the downstairs kitchen (D25 to 20%, D27,D28 and D12 to

40%, D10 to 50%) when pressed after 11pm. At other times, this button only

activates the lights in the adjacent hallway (D27 to 80%).

The Goodnight button (with the engraved moon icon) shuts the home down if

pressed for longer than three seconds. This press delay is done to avoid

accidental activation as for the adjacent Panic button (with the engraved

bell icon). The Goodnight setting turns Off everything in and around the home, connected to the Philips

Dynalite system. In addition, blinds are drawn closed and the airconditioning system is turned off. The

Philips Dynalite control system then indicates to the security system that the home’s perimeter (front

door and window reed switches and glass break sensors) is to be sealed, securing the home while

everyone sleeps.

load controllers

The following load schedule outlines the devices found in the ground floor distribution board. The

DDMC801 mixed controller is used for dimming resistive type lamps within the apartment. One

controller (Box 3) has been fitted with a four-channel relay module (LSRM401 4 x 1A) and a four-channel

leading edge dimming module (LSDM401 4 x 1A). The other controllers have been fitted with 2 x LSDM401

modules. The DDRC810DT-GL is used to switch Extra Low Voltage (ELV) loads such as the irrigation

solenoids that are usually powered by a 24VDC power supply. ELV loads must never be switched on this

same device when switching 240VAC loads also.

load schedule for distribution board on ground floor

Load Controller Cct Capacity

Drawing Designator

Fixture Qty Load


DDMC802 Box 1 C2 240W D2 LV Downlight 50W 6 300W*

DDMC802 Box 1 C3 240W D3 Incandescent 50W uplight 1 50W

















WIR

DNstairs

Fan

Balcony

Reading

Lights



DDMC802 Box 3 C5 240W R12 Exhaust fan 1 240W

DDMC802 Box 3 C6 240W R13 Exhaust fan 1 240W

DDMC802 Box 3 C7 240W R17 CFL Bick light 15W 1 15W

DDMC802 Box 3 C8 240W R10 LV Dowlight 50W 2 100W

DDRC1220FR Box 4 C1 2400W R8 LV Downlight 50W 1 50W

DDRC1220FR Box 4 C2 2400W R1 CFL Brick light 15W 4 60W

DDRC1220FR Box 4 C3 2400W R9 LV Downlight 50W 2 100W

DDRC1220FR Box 4 C4 2400W R11 T5 Linear Fluorescent 18W 3 54W

DDRC1220FR Box 4 C5 2400W R14 Incandescent 100W 4 400W

DDRC1220FR Box 4 C6 2400W R15 Incandescent 100W 2 200W

DDRC1220FR Box 4 C7 2400W R16 CFL Brick light 15W 3 45W

DDRC1220FR Box 4 C8 2400W R28 CFL Bollard 10W 6 60W

DDRC1220FR Box 4 C9 2400W R29 DFL Bollard 10W 10 100W

DDRC1220FR Box 4 C10 2400W R18 TF Linear fluorescent 1 18W



DDRC810DT Box 5 C1 240W R3 Projector screen motor 1 500W

DDRC810DT Box 5 C2 240W R4 Projector screen motor 1 500W

DDRC810DT Box 5 C3 240W R5 Curtain motor 1 500W

DDRC810DT Box 5 C4 240W R6 Curtain motor 1 500W







DDRC810DT Box 6 C3 2400W 1 500W

DDRC810DT Box 6 C4 2400W 1 500W

DDRC810DT Box 6 C5 2400W 1 500W

DDRC810DT Box 6 C6 2400W 1 500W

DDRC810DT Box 6 C7 2400W 1 500W

DDRC810DT Box 6 C8 2400W 1 500W

DDRC810DT Box 7 C1 ELV R7 Pulsed dry contact** 1 ELV

DDRC810DT Box 7 C2 ELV R25 ELV Irrigation solenoid 1 ELV



DDRC810DT Box 7 C5 ELV 1 ELV




DDRC820FR Box 8 C1 4800W R19 Pool cleaner 1 4800W

DDRC820FR Box 8 C2 4800W R20 Pool water jet pump 1 4800W

DDRC820FR Box 8 C3 4800W R21 Pool waterfall pump 1 4800W

DDRC820FR Box 8 C4 4800W R22 Other pool plant 1 4800W



*The maximum load current for any DDMC802 output is 2A. Each plug-in module such as the DDLM102

should never have more than 2A load connected to it. When 8 x DDLM102 modules are used with a

DDMC802 controller base/motherboard the total load current should not exceed 10A and it is strongly

recommended that each such controller be protected with its own dedicated circuit breaker.

**Applies to certain garage door models that require a pulsed dry contact to operate up, stop and down

in that order.


application guide office

Dynalite Application Guide – Office Page 1 of 8


Providing workspace lighting using dimmable DALI HF fluorescent ballasts

Using existing PCs and LAN for user control in open plan office space

Automatic control using occupancy sensing

Daylight harvesting of natural light

Dynamic LED signage

Interfacing to a building management system (BMS) using DCOM over TCP/IP

Lighting control plays a strategic role in the operation of a modern office environment. It ensures that

the visual performance of the lighting equipment is appropriate to the needs of the occupants, while

simultaneously conserving energy. By day, illumination levels can be maintained dynamically, both to

comply with relevant lighting and energy codes and to ensure optimum worker performance. After

hours, the control is more aggressive toward energy conservation, but still accommodates the needs of

maintenance and security staff and late night workers. It is no longer socially acceptable or

commercially astute to burn all of the lighting throughout the day and for half the night, yet a feeling of

personal security and well being must be protected.

Workstations co-exist with traditional enclosed offices in many buildings. Appropriate strategies for the

lighting controls must be determined according to the specific needs of each application. The

workstations typically share an array of fluorescents overhead while corridors, lobbies, meeting rooms

and amenities can have a variety of local lighting types and technologies.

typical layout

up

downStaff Amenities Exec Office

Toilet

Floor Distribution Board

Meeting

Instant HWS

Lift

Toilet

S5 S6

S3 S4

S1

S10

S9

S2

Circuit 1

Circuit 1

Circuit 1

Circuit 1

Circuit 1

Circuit 1

Circuit 1

Circuit 2

Circuit 3

Circuit 4

Circuit 5

Circuit 6

Circuit 8

Circuit 7

Circuit 9

CP1

CP3

CP2

Circuit 10

Circuits 11 - 14LED Sign

Circuit 12

S8

S7

LEGEND

Incandescent LV

Fluorescent Luminaire

Hot Water Service

SensorS6

Page 2 of 8 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Office

system outline

A typical office suite could be a single office or just one floor of many that is tenanted by a large

organisation. Entry areas are accessible to visitors and clients, hence track or downlights would be found

here, in addition to dynamic LED signage that highlights the company logo.

The open plan area would have fluorescent luminaires that are laid out in a regular pattern to achieve

uniformity. They are often wired in large blocks and inefficiently switched the same way (this is

inevitable where the design is based on an empty floorplan). For undimmed installations, the cabling

would at least be run parallel to windows, enabling a row of edge luminaires to be daylight switched by

the control system.

The evolution of addressable fluorescent ballasts has made it possible to treat individual luminaires as a

dynamic component of the space, with lighting over workstations controlled individually or in small

numbers. This is becoming cost-effective considering the frequent rearrangement that takes place in

many organisations. The layout appears to be conventional, but the unique response from individual

lamps is achieved electronically. In corridors and entry foyers, identical lighting troffers can be treated

in an entirely different manner to those above the desks of employees. They might also be found in

staff amenities areas, where their purpose is different again, due to the low occupancy of the space.

The meeting room shows four circuits of downlights, while the fringe areas including staff amenities

have just a few essential lights that could be of almost any type.

Operation of a typical office would be;

entry lobby

The first person to arrive would be detected by the nearby DUS804C motion sensor or would be required

to initiate a system response by pressing the „ARRIVAL‟ button of an adjacent wall control panel.

Typically, two channels of a DDRC820FR relay controller would activate the entry downlights. This

lighting could be interleaved so that half-switching is implemented outside normal hours. Philips

Dynalite controllers have the intelligence to rotate lamp usage to equalise the operating hours of the

lamps and reduce maintenance costs. ELV downlights might also be included to provide an attractive

feature at the reception counter. The appropriate Philips Dynalite controller would be a leading-edge or

trailing-edge dimmer, depending on the type of lighting transformer used. Increasingly, specifiers are

using digitally-controlled transformers that can be matched to standard Philips Dynalite ballast

controllers. Innovative display panels are available using LED or fluorescent panels that drift through the

spectrum. Dynamic colour sequences can be programmed into the DDLEDC401 LED Controller. When the

system is in its „normal‟ day mode, the selected sequence can then be initiated.

Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Office Page 3 of 8

Fluorescent lights are generally the most numerous throughout an office installation. The choice of

internal components is fundamental to the selection of the Philips Dynalite system components to

control them.

Depending on the budget, a degree of sophistication is now available. Dimmable office lighting is

becoming more common for both ergonomic and energy-conscious applications. The ability to dim has a

direct bearing on the aesthetics and comfort of the space and is also significant in conserving energy. A

luminaire that can be switched on and off electronically, has a wide range of control possibilities. It can

also eliminate the expensive practice of physically modifying the electrical wiring each time the office

fit-out changes.

executive offices

These are often as elaborate as a fully-featured conference room. Multifunction sensors and wall

mounted user control panels may be used in combination to provide full architectural control, depending

on the complexity of the lighting scenes required. As this is also a working office, PC desktop access to

the Philips Dynalite network might be appropriate, as well as wall mount control panels.

small offices

Small offices don‟t consume a great deal of energy but collectively the total energy of many small

offices is significant. In a refurbishment that includes individual offices, it is not cost-effective to hard-

wire a conventional switch for just two or three luminaires. Increasingly though, it is becoming

mandatory for a local control device to be made available. Software added to the Desktop PC that can

access the lighting control system can allow each user to control their own local environment as there is

no additional hardware required.

open plan offices

A variety of approaches are available, subject to the luminaire control gear and to local energy

regulations. Networked DyNet sensors may be used to provide saturation coverage of open plan areas.

All lights might be kept „ON‟ during a normal day and be progressively allowed to dim and extinguish

after hours as staff leave. Multifunction sensors read the value of illuminance in their field of view.

This can be harnessed to provide stepless dimming control; both to maintain a pre-determined light level

and to capitalise on the availability of natural light. Philips Dynalite sensors support multiple functions

allowing presence detection and natural light level measurement from the one device.

staff amenities

In these areas, occupancy sensing is usually appropriate with long delay times. The luminaires might be

the conventional office type or any combination of aesthetic creations. If toilet lights are to be simply

switched, they can share a common relay channel. If some of the lighting is extra low voltage halogen,

however, it should be managed by a leading-edge or trailing-edge dimmer as appropriate, to enable soft

starting and voltage regulation to the lamp. An alternative approach is to have the lights „ON‟ during


normal hours and to enable a DUS804C sensor or single „one shot‟ pushbutton panel after hours. In this

event, the lights can be flashed off momentarily as a warning, before the lighting is switched off.

conference rooms

Architectural lighting control is required to adjust the lighting of the space to its many different

applications. A 10-button wall mounted control panel provides the required scene and fade rate. A

hand-held infrared remote control might be appropriate to adjust the lighting from anywhere in the

room during presentations or meetings. Most Philips Dynalite controllers have an optional DMX interface

that enables inter-operability with audio-visual devices, while many AV systems natively support the

DyNet protocol. Multifunction sensors are used to detect when rooms have been vacant for a period of

time.

staircases

Local regulations must always be adhered to. Aside from this, common sense should prevail. The

staircase lighting would usually remain on during „normal‟ hours, with a single pushbutton made

available for timed override after hours. If appropriate, stairway lighting could be made to flash briefly

as a warning before lights are extinguished. If regulating ballasts are used, they could be ramped down

over 30 seconds before switching off.

demand load shedding

Many parts of the world experience peak electricity loads that their infrastructure is unable to deliver.

The solution is to defer some of the load at those critical moments. A Philips Dynalite control system

can have it‟s load prioritised for such an event. Low requirement loads can be partially shed, almost

transparently when dimming is available. Depending on the urgency of the request to load shed, a

hierarchy of switching can be implemented. Unlike airconditioning, lighting can be made granular,

enabling corridors, for example, to respond to a greater extent than the adjacent workstations.

out-of-hours

This may be determined by the BMS or by a Philips Dynalite DTC602 stand-alone timer clock. On an

individual office floor, it is common for just one or two workers to be at their workstations when

everyone else has gone home. Manual control regimes leave the entire office alight, while many

automated systems create a feeling of insecurity by switching off all the lights in the immediate vicinity

of the occupant/s. In a Philips Dynalite controlled environment, lighting in the corridors and amenities

can be kept on when any one of the local zones is active. Cleaners and security personnel often waste

energy after hours. Philips Dynalite systems can allow transient personnel to gain lighting access using

infrared remote controls. These can be programmed to provide an appropriate duration of local or

corridor lighting. For example, a cleaner may have local workstations illuminated for ten minutes, while

a security guard might just activate the corridor lighting for five minutes. The remote only needs to be

pointed at any of the DUS804C sensors in the local area.


daylighting strategy

This is a topic for separate detailed analysis, as each application is unique. During daylight hours, the

ingress of natural light can be selectively harvested within parts of the space that have a component of

natural light.

Some designers always switch off perimeter lighting, while an increasing number apply light sensors for

detecting the natural sunlight available and then dim the lighting accordingly . This action must be

carefully undertaken to avoid issues of disturbing or reduce the comfort of those occupying the space.

In particular, care should be exercised where window blinds are in use due to the possibility of

fragmenting a light detection zone. As with other issues of „granularity‟, the solution might be to deploy

a greater number of sensors. The challenge of harnessing daylight is to attenuate the artificial light

without creating discomfort that is associated with bright windows and dull interiors. Philips Dynalite‟s

networked DUS804C sensors detect illuminance as well as occupancy. They each contain embedded

intelligence, enabling their response to be varied at different times of the day. When excess natural

light falls on a perimeter row, the occupancy sensor might allow dimming to a very low level in the

absence of motion, but dim to 50% when occupancy is detected. This is often necessary to avoid

shadowing and provide adequate horizontal illuminance on desk surfaces. DALI ballasts provide an

appropriate vehicle for daylight response, as there is no longer a physical connection between the hard-

wired circuitry and the ability of individual luminaires to be dimmed. Luminaires that run parallel to the

windows may be switched or dimmed, irrespective of their physical wiring.

maintained illuminance

This strategy can offer greater savings than daylight harvesting, as previously discussed. In the absence

of any natural light (late at night for example), the Illuminance levels of many workstations and

corridors are far greater than is recommended in lighting standards. This can be harvested by the

stepless dimming of controllable fluorescent lighting. Once a target level has been established, a

desirable light level will be maintained irrespective of environmental changes in the space. Savings of

10-20% are typical, while greater than 50% is not uncommon in the retrofit of „70s buildings.

maintenance reporting

Intelligent lighting control gear has enabled Philips Dynalite systems to collect data about individual

lamps and luminaire components in real time. Lamp run-time tracking is available, which assists with

scheduled lamp replacement. The strategic use of this resource can reduce life cycle operating costs

and avoid the drift into a sub-standard installation. Individual component ballast or lamp failures may

be reported to management from a Philips Dynalite controller or an informed GSM message may be sent

directly to maintenance personnel.


the equipment

This diagram outlines the equipment required for a typical multi-story application. Each floor is

connected to the others by a DNG485 network bridge. This enables a higher speed trunk to

communicate filtered messages between the floors. It also provides optical isolation as a protection

measure.



PC control

Desktop PC Access is available to locally control individual workspace

lighting, blinds and possibly airflow using each occupant‟s desktop

PC. EnvisionProject establishes an interface between the Philips

Dynalite RS485 network and the corporate IP network. The physical

location of individual clients on the LAN is logically linked to the

occupants‟ local lighting hardware. Functions made by a desktop

slider or icon selection are immediately processed in the DyNet

system, invoking a personalised response. Outside normal hours, the

availability of local lighting can be linked to whether or not the local

PC is active. If it is hibernating or switched off, the office lighting

can be extinguished. EnvisionProject also provides bi-directional

access to the BMS, which enables centralised monitoring and

scheduling of the lighting control system that has been tailored to the

specific installation.

Smaller applications might only operate locally, not through a BMS. A

simpler dry-contact interface (DDMIDC8) might then be used to

transfer some basic instructions to another system. For example, the

alarm output level of a security or EWOS (Emergency Warning) system

might be used to enable a panic mode in the lighting system or

occupancy detection from the lighting system might be passed on to

the security system after hours via a spare relay output channel. In

most instances, a single interface on the RS485 trunk makes the

hardware connection between the two systems, either simply or at a

high level.

sensors

Sensors S1-S10 are all DUS804C, which combine motion detection, PE measurement and IR reception. In

this scenario, IR reception would not be used. Some sensors such as S8, S9 and S10 in the staff

amenities, would be configured permanently for motion detection and would ensure lighting is switched

off when the space was not occupied. Others would be configured to do different things at different

times of the day.

S5 and S6 are adjacent to windows so that during the day they could be configured to dim the row of

fixtures near the windows whenever sufficient natural light was available. This practice is commonly

referred to as “Daylight Harvesting”. After hours, the sensors would automatically switch over to motion

detection mode.

Example of simple PC control software

from an icon in the system tray


load controllers

Circuits 7-10 are switched fluorescent loads and are controlled by a relay controller. The DDRC820FR

shown in our example has 20 Amp inductive load capability and bi-stable latching relays. This one

device has 6 independent outputs; hence it is cost-effective to also switch the toilets and stairwell

lighting, as well as having the capacity to control the instant hot water heater.

A DDBC120-DALI controller enables individual dimming and soft switching of commercial fluorescent DALI

troffers on Circuit 1. When all troffers connected to the controller are switched off it automatically

removes the power to the troffers to save energy, as DALI ballasts continue to consume a few Watts,

even when switched off.

Circuits 2-6 are controlled by a DDMC802 Multipurpose Controller, which incorporates modular control

cards. A 1 x 2A dimming module (DDLM102) controls a circuit of downlights and a 1 x 4A dimming

module (DDLM104) controls 10 LV down light fittings over the boardroom table.

A DDLEDC401 LED controller is part of our demonstration to highlight the growing use of dynamic display

items in commercial venues, in this case dynamic signage displaying the company logo.

load schedule Load Controller Cct

Capacity Drawing Designator

Fixture Qty Load

DDBC120-DALI Box 1 C1 4800W Circuit 1 2x36W Fluorescent Troffer 29 2088W

DDMC802 Box 2 C1 240W Circuit 3 50W Downlight 3 150W





DDMC802 Box 2 C6 1200W Spare



DDRC820FR Box 3 C1 4800W Circuit 7 1x36W Fluorescent Batten 1 36W




DDRC820FR Box 3 C5 4800W Circuit 12 Instant Hot Water Heater 1 2400W

DDRC820FR Box 3 C6 4800W Spare

DDLEDC401 Box 4 C1 24V 1A Circuit 11 LED Signage – Red channel 1 0.75A

DDLEDC401 Box 4 C2 24V 1A Circuit 11 LED Signage – Green channel 1 0.75A

DDLEDC401 Box 4 C3 24V 1A Circuit 11 LED Signage – Blue channel 1 0.75A

DDLEDC401 Box 4 C4 24V 1A Circuit 11 LED Signage – White channel 1 0.75A


application guide themed venue

Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Themed Venue Page 1 of 5


Provisioning for temporary DMX512 control

Control of LED & cold cathode neon lighting

Control using a touchscreen with graphical floorplan representations

Lighting control in themed venues is vital to ensure appropriate environmental aesthetics and functional

illumination. Themed venues such as restaurants, bar and clubs, can be used for a range of purposes

which can vary extensively throughout the course of a day. Lighting levels during preparation and

cleaning phases need to be appropriate so that tasks can be carried out in a safe and efficient manner.

During times of patronage, adjustments to lighting levels are necessary to provide the appropriate

architectural appearance for the atmosphere desired. Dining areas will frequently require a range of

settings when used for functions to align with event proceedings such as seating, serving, dining,

presentation and departure. Discerning clients may often request alternate settings to create a unique

environment. Lighting in podium or stage areas will also require a range of settings for different uses,

such as live performances and presentations. For certain events or functions it may also be necessary

for the lighting to operate in unison with temporary entertainment of theatrical lighting systems.

Provision should also be included to link the security system ensuring all lighting is turned off when the

system is armed, so that energy is conserved outside of operating hours.

typical layout

Stage

Bar

Café Bar

Restaurant

Kitchen

Legend

Downlights

Wall Lights

Pendant

4 Colour

LED

Neon

Fluorescent

Batten

DTK

600

CP1

CP2

CP3

CP2User Control

Point

Circuit 1

Circuit 2

Circuit 3Circuit 4

Circuit 5Circuit 6 Circuit 7

Circuit 8

Circuit 9Circuit 10

Circuit 11

Circuit 12

Circuit 13

Circuit 14

Circuit 15

Cove 1

Cove 2

Page 2 of 5 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Themed Venue

system outline

The application example detailed is based on a typical themed restaurant venue. Eight channels of cove

recessed 4-colour LED strip and two circuits of central decorative luminaires provide main dining area

lighting. For patron access, four circuits of down lights are used to illuminate the perimeter of dining

areas. The bar incorporates a circuit of low voltage down lights over the serving counter and two

channels of decorative overhead neon feature lighting. One circuit of low voltage fixtures is installed

behind the bar for staff access and a circuit of track lighting included for rear wall feature lighting.

Stage lighting includes a single circuit of recessed down lights and three circuits of adjustable track

mounted spot fixtures. Linear fluorescent fixtures are used within the kitchen.

the equipment


User control panels CP1, CP2 and CP3 are provided to enable the system control necessary at each

location. The DTP170 LCD Touchscreen located at the bar is used for advanced control and programming

functions. The DTP170 includes the facility to create a series of display pages that enable users to

adjust presets for specific event requirements. The DDNP1501 is utilised to supplement the network

power supply, as required for operation of the touchscreen.


control panels

Control panel CP1 is located at the staff entrance as a master control

point for staff entering and leaving the premises. The control panel

incorporates two pushbuttons and a key-locking switch. The key switch

enables the control panel operation, to ensure that there is no

unauthorised use. This is particularly important, as the “OFF” button is a

master off control that will turn off all lighting within the restaurant. The

“ON” button would usually select a welcome scene or a cleaners‟ lighting

scene that would provide sufficient light for cleaners to work, without

consuming excess power or expending lamp life unnecessarily.

The Maitre D‟ station would be located at the entrance door, where guests can check their reservations

and then be guided to their tables. A four-scene control panel (CP2) would be located at this point and

would comprise the following scenes:

CP3 would, in addition to the preset functions detailed above, also

have four preset scenes, five through to eight. These would set the

lighting on a preset basis for the channels associated with the stage.

The panel also includes four manual slide faders, so that stage lighting

circuits can be independently adjusted.

1 Set Up This scene is used when the restaurant staff is laying up the tables, prior to

opening at lunchtime and for dinner. It is a practical „working‟ scene, rather

than an aesthetic scene.

2 Lunch This button selects a preset scene for the lunch period. This is a relatively bright

scene to compensate for natural daylight encountered by patrons before entering

and after exiting the restaurant.

3 Dinner This button selects a preset scene for the dinner period. This scene would be a

lower level with the emphasis on ambience.

4 Show This button selects a scene to be used when there is a live show on the stage.

Note that this scene would be the same as the manual button on the local

control panel on stage. In this scene the general lighting would be reduced so

that attention would be drawn to the stage. Stage circuits would come under

manual control from the faders on control panel CP3. This would enable the

band or individual artist to set up a manual scene for the stage area to suit the

performance on stage, without altering what has been set in the dining and bar

areas.

ON

OFF

ENABLE

DISABLE

PANEL

CP1

SET UP

LUNCH

DINNER

SHOW

CP2

4

3

2

1

8

7

6

5

CP3

Page 4 of 5 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Themed Venue

touch screen

The DTP170 LCD Touchscreen would include scene selection pages, manual override pages and a timer

clock to automatically select scenes. A graphical image of the entire restaurant floor plan could be a

page in itself and from this page, it would be possible to review the current status of all lighting and

temporarily modify the settings in one area for a special event. This is ideal for situations such as

„birthday cake entrance‟ or for corporate entertainment evenings. In this page, simply touching one

area of the restaurant – e.g. Restaurant, would then drill down the screen to that area only. It would

then be possible to adjust individual circuits on a raise/lower basis.

Customised touchscreen pages provide the ability to „drill down‟ and adjust individual circuits within an area.

The touchscreen can also be programmed with a series of creative fade or chase sequences for the

decorative neon and four colour LED circuits. These sequences can be set into operation when required

from a custom display page. One sequence might include a series of long subtle colour fades to align

with theme changes over the course of an evening. More lively sequences might also be programmed to

create theatrical effects for celebrations or parties.

Some other functions available from this control position could be a “waiter call” button, to ring a

buzzer in the kitchen to request the presence of a waiter to take an order. Another facility that can be

provided is a panic function to send all of the lighting to full in the event of an emergency.


load controllers

The DLE410 (4 x 10A) and DLE1205 (12 x 5A) leading edge dimmers are used for controlling the

combination of mains and low voltage incandescent lighting circuits. One channel on the DLE1205 is also

configured to provide switched output for control of the fluorescent kitchen lighting. The DLE1205 can

also be optimised to be dual ported, which enables the dimmer to be controlled over the popular

DMX512 protocol from a portable theatrical/entertainment lighting control desk when used for specific

functions or events. Control from the security system can be easily integrated through a dry output

connected to the AUX input of any controller. Two DLEDC401 LED controllers are utilised so creative

colour mixing and sequencing routines can be programmed for the two groups of four colour (RGBW) LED

recessed cove lighting.

load schedule

Load Controller Cct

Capacity

Drawing

Designator

Fixture Qty Load

DLE410 Box 1 C1 2400W Circuit 1 Decorative Pendant 700W 2 1400W

DLE410 Box 1 C2 2400W Circuit 2 Decorative Pendant 700W 3 2100W





DLE1205 Box 2 C3 1200W Circuit 7 LV Track Lighting 50W 4 200W





DLE1205 Box 2 C8 1200W Circuit12 Wall Light 100W 7 700W

DLE1205 Box 2 C9 1200W Circuit 13 Adjustable Spot 100W 4 400W


DLE1205 Box 2 C11 1200W Circuit 15 HF Fluorescent 2 x 36W 6 432W


DDLEDC401 Box 3 C1 24V 1A Cove 1 LED Strip – Red channel 1 0.75A

DDLEDC401 Box 3 C2 24V 1A Cove 1 LED Strip – Green channel 1 0.75A

DDLEDC401 Box 3 C3 24V 1A Cove 1 LED Strip – Blue channel 1 0.75A

DDLEDC401 Box 3 C4 24V 1A Cove 1 LED Strip – White channel 1 0.75A

DDLEDC401 Box 4 C1 24V 1A Cove 2 LED Strip – Red channel 1 0.75A

DDLEDC401 Box 4 C2 24V 1A Cove 2 LED Strip – Green channel 1 0.75A

DDLEDC401 Box 4 C3 24V 1A Cove 2 LED Strip – Blue channel 1 0.75A

DDLEDC401 Box 4 C4 24V 1A Cove 2 LED Strip – White channel 1 0.75A



4. Technical Guides

technical guide control principles

Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Control Principles Page 1 of 11

overview

This document outlines the structure and principles employed in a Philips Dynalite control system,

including information on DyNet network architecture, operating concepts, system commands, device

addressing and other associated features.

system structure

The Philips Dynalite system utilises a true distributed processing architecture, where a range of devices

are interconnected over an RS485 network to form a complete control solution. All commands and

status information is passed to all devices over this network using the event based DyNet protocol. All

Philips Dynalite control devices incorporate an integral microprocessor and internal non-volatile

memory. This allows for each device to store its own configuration data and possessing requirements to

perform the required features and functions, meeting the project requirements. All device

configurations are configured through the use of EnvisionProject, Philips Dynalite‟s commissioning,

monitoring and control software, used to bring the individual devices together to form a system solution

for projects needs.

Philips Dynalite‟s distribution of intelligent devices architecture, dramatically improves reliability over

systems that incorporate centralised processors, where malfunction of one device could result in total

system failure. Should a single device fail in a Philips Dynalite system, all other devices will continue to

operate as normal. This distributed architecture also supports a wide range of interfaces, manufactured

by Philips Dynalite and other system vendors, to offer a robust flexible approach to control of lighting

and other automation systems found in modern projects.

Philips Dynalite‟s range of control products can be broadly categorised as a relationship between; User

Interfaces, Integration devices and Load Controllers. The user interface range includes many different

user control panels, LCD touchscreens, timer clocks, computer head-end software and sensors. User

interfaces are generally programmed to trigger single command messages onto the DyNet network, in

response to a user or input action. Integration devices have been developed to allow other third-party

systems that are commonly found within projects to control the Philips Dynalite system or vice versa.

This allows many systems to work together achieving a required task and reducing the need for the end-

user to interact with each individual system. Philips Dynalite has developed an extensive range of

controllers with a variety of output types, combinations and load ratings. Load controllers constantly

listen to the network messages from Dynet and only respond to command messages that relate to the

controller‟s specific addressing configuration. Control associations are established between user

interfaces, integration devices and load controllers using straightforward addressing and command

techniques with in the Dynet protocol.

Page 2 of 11 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Control Principles

device addressing

physical

Each Philips Dynalite load controller on the Dynet network can be identified as a device type and a box

number. With this information the different devices on single networks can be individually addressed for

commissioning. All physical control channels within the load controllers of a Philips Dynalite system have

a Physical and Logical Address. Physical addresses are used within the load controllers and refer to the

physical control channel within a device. This is primarily used during system commissioning to configure

devices as they can be used to identify the individual channels. To identify an individual circuit

connected to a load controller, a Device Type, Box Number and Physical channel number are used by the

commissioning software Envision. The term Physical refers to the individual physical attributes of the

control point. For example a 12 Channel load controller could be addressed as Box 1 and will always

have 12 Physical Channels. These Channels are physically different from the Channels in 12 Channel load

controller Box 2. Physical addresses are also used for reporting system diagnostic information related to

hardware operation.

Similarly for a user interface panel, a Device Type, Box Number and Physical button number are used for

addressing the different input options. Physical addressing is also used to obtain operating parameter

variables from specific devices. An example of this is a technique that can be adopted with a sensor.

Sensors are normally configured to directly issue commands when particular lighting levels are reached

or movement is detected. However, in certain projects it may be necessary to create separate control

routines external from the sensor based on the lighting level sensed or occupancy status detected. This

can be achieved by directly addressing the sensor with physical messages, thus bypassing the device

configuration. This type of message could directly query the sensor for status information of occupancy.

This feature is typically used when a monitoring system is added to the Philips Dynalite installation such

as airconditioning control systems.

logical

Load controller output channels and user control panel buttons are generally configured to logical Areas,

independent of their physical characteristics i.e. the device they are connected to. This logical overlay

enables control points to be grouped regardless of their physical association. A Logical Channel is a

nominated Physical Channel that is assigned to an Area. Multiple physical channels in different load

controllers can be grouped together into logical areas for network addressing requirements. This allows

the Dynet network to control many different physical channels with one network message. The Philips

Dynalite system can support up to 65,535 Areas and each Area up to 65,535 Logical Channels. It is also

possible to assign more than one Physical Channel to a single Logical area. In a lighting control

application, consider the scenario of a large room with 9 Physical Channels driving downlights along the

length of the wall. All of these Physical Channels can be assigned to just one Logical area. This

simplifies operation of large installations, as the end-user only has to make adjustments to one channel.


The Philips Dynalite system can be divided into smaller subsections using logical addressing. Consider

the example of a dimmer that supplies lighting circuits to two rooms, with a user control panel in each

room. The controller lighting circuits and the control plate in Room 1 would be configured as Area 2,

and the controller lighting circuits and the control plate in Room 2 would be configured as Area 3. The

end result would be that the control plate set to Area 2 would only control or program circuits

designated Area 2 and the control plate set to Area 3 would only control or program circuits designated

Area 3, so the two rooms will operate independently of each other.

Area 2

Office 1

Logical

Channel 1 CP1 CP2

Load

(Outputs)

1 Phase 40A

DLE410

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

Logical

Channel 2

Area 3

Office 2

Logical

Channel 1

Logical

Channel 2

The ability to logically bind individual control channels into groups is essential in installations involving a

large number of channels. Without this facility it would not be practical to view and configure the

control channels within a project as they would need to be addressed individually. Configuration and

maintenance of systems that do not allow for physical channels to be grouped into logical areas can

therefore become quite cumbersome and time consuming to configure or edit requested changes.

preset states

During commissioning each Philips Dynalite load controller may be configured with a number of output

states, which are referred to as Presets. Most load controllers will typically accommodate up to 170

presets. The preset defines a specific output level for each channel of the controller.

Scene 1 Scene 2 Scene 3 Scene 4OFF1

2

3

4 Prog

The illustration above is a typical lighting control application where different intensities of the lighting

are required for each of the four channels. These are set and stored in the controller‟s memory during

commissioning. It is then possible to “recall” these settings from the controller‟s memory from a single


network message at the touch of a button or at predetermined times, from a timer clock or

automatically from an integrated building management system.

A typical application for this approach would be in a hotel coffee shop, where the proprietor requires a

pre-determined lighting “scene” for breakfast, another for lunch, one for dinner and another for

suppertime. These settings can be preset and then simply recalled at the touch of a button. The time

for the change to fade from one scene to another may also be preset and stored in memory. This way

the patrons do not feel any visual discomfort when the lighting changes from one mood to another over,

say, 10 minutes and all the lighting channels will change at the same time.

operating concepts

The Philips Dynalite system can be controlled in several different ways, dependent on application

requirements. Output changes can be achieved using Area Preset or Channel Level command messages.

The most common approach is Area Preset control where Preset states stored within the controller are

recalled. Area Preset command messages will affect all control points that are assigned to the

respective message Area. An example of this would be a button press on a user control panel that is

configured to issue an Area Preset command, say Area 1 go to Preset 1 over 5 seconds. All load

controllers with channels assigned to Area 1 would change from their current preset to preset 1 output

state in five seconds. Status indicators on all user control panels with buttons assigned to Area 1 Preset

1 will also follow accordingly. This network interaction of all devices responding to the same message

allows for simpler commissioning as only one network message is needed to instigate changes in multiple

devices, either load controllers or user interfaces. Preset control is ideally suited to applications where a

large number of channels are to be controlled in a single area.

The ability to recall a preset scene affecting multiple load channels in one area with a single network

message is critical in architectural lighting applications. Systems that do not include provision to store

presets or require multiple network messages to achieve a state or scene change may produce a

discernable cascade effect as the channels sequentially receive individual level commands. This often

produces an undesirable „mexican-wave‟ effect and network traffic complications.

If required, channel Level command messages can also be used to affect output change on a specific

Channel within a defined Area. An example of this would be a user control panel button configured to

issue the message Area 1 Channel 1 go to 50% over 5 seconds. All load controller channels assigned to

Area 1 Channel 1 would go to 50% output in 5 seconds. This method can be used where individual

channel control is required and the number of channels is low. It is typically used in a home or small

office environments where the user wishes to manually change the load controller output levels.


programmable logic control

All Philips Dynalite user interface devices also incorporate programmable logic control functionality.

Using Envision software it is possible to author and embed complex programs within these devices that

use arithmetic, sequential and conditional logic functions. These programs are referred to as tasks.

Tasks can be triggered from within a device or from another device on the same network.

Tasks are often used in applications where a single input or user interface action is required to deliver

control over multiple areas. An example in architectural lighting applications would be a “welcome”

function on a user control panel located at an entry point to a residence or office. When operated, the

task issues a sequence of area preset commands required to illuminate an access path through the

installation.

system commands

The Philips Dynalite system utilises a range of commands that can be assigned to any user interface

control or device input during system configuration. The assigned command is issued on the DyNet

network when a corresponding user or input action occurs. The following table summarises the range of

control commands that are commonly used.

Preset Recall Commands

Set Area/Channel to Preset Recall Preset # for all Channels assigned to logical Area # in # seconds

Set Area/Channel to Off Set all Channels assigned to logical Area # to off in # seconds

Level Recall Messages

Set Area/ Channel to Level Set all Channels or Channel # in logical Area # to Level # over # seconds

Ramping Commands

Ramp Area/Channel Up Start Ramping all Channels or Channel # toward 100% at a # ramp rate

Ramp Area/Channel Down Start Ramping all Channels or Channel # toward 0% at a # ramp rate

Stop Ramping Area/Channel Stop all Channels or Channel # in logical Area # from ramping

Stop Ramping Area/Channel And

Programme Preset

Stop all Channels or Channel # in logical Area # from ramping and program

current levels to preset

Area Control Commands

Program Levels to Preset Save present output Levels in logical Area # to current Preset

Set area to Panic Mode Set all channels in logical Area # to the Panic Preset, disable and lock all user

interface panels assigned to the respective logical Area

Revert Area to Unpanic Mode Unlock and enable all user interface panels in logical Area #

Enable/Disable Panels Enable/Disable all user interface panel buttons assigned to logical Area #

Enable/Disable Motion Detectors Enable/Disable motion detectors assigned to logical Area #

Enable/Disable Photo Electric

Detectors

Enable/Disable all photo electric detectors assigned to logical Area #

Set Area Preset Offset Apply offset of # to all future Preset messages received by logical Area #


Set/Clear Area Links Set/ Clear area links between channels assigned to logical Area #

Status Commands

Area Status

Request/Reply Current Preset Request current Preset in logical Area #. System replies with current Preset #

for respective logical Area #.

Request/Reply Current Area Link

State

Request current area links between channels assigned to logical Area #

Channel Status

Request/Reply Channel Level Request current Channel Level # for logical Channel # in logical Area #.

System replies with current Channel Level # for respective logical Channel #

in respective logical Area #

The Philips Dynalite system supports many commands beyond those outlined above. Further details are

available on request.

global functions

It is possible to send every area on a network to a single Preset using Area 0 (zero) as the addressed

Area. There are implications when adopting this method where different third-party devices are in use

such as curtains etc. For this reason Preset messages to specified Areas are the preferred method of

global control.

combining control spaces

Applications where de-mountable partitions or removable walls are being used (typically in areas such as

hotel ballrooms, training rooms and conference centres) will require the control system to combine and

separate lighting groups. It is usual that each space has its own user control panel. When the partitions

are opened or closed, thus dividing a room, it is most important that the control system for the lighting

should also combine or segregate in harmony with the partition status. In practice this means that when

a room is divided, the control panel in one section must not be able to control the lighting in another

section. However, as soon as the partition is opened, both control panels should work in parallel. This

completely automates the room-combining function, so the user does not have to worry about

configuring the system to suit the current arrangement. Philips Dynalite‟s supports Join or Area Link

functions can be used to combine or separate control groups in these applications.

The Join function is suitable for applications where there are a small number of separate sections

involved. The Join function enables an Area to be divided into a number of sub sections. Sub sections

can be combined and separated using the appropriate Join command. Area linking should be used in

applications involving a large number of sections. This function modifies the load controllers to

temporarily assign channels to more than one Area. With area linking, it is possible to create temporary

control links between a total of 24 independent Areas with two-way control from each panel within the

area that is being linked. The obvious main difference between this method and Join is the ability of


area link to combine a greater number of areas to work together as one larger area.

A dedicated Base Link Area can also be used to act as a global area for Channels assigned to that Base

Link Area and is useful as a global control for a block of Areas. The channels to be controlled are

assigned during commissioning and can be in one of the 24 areas above the dedicated Base Link Area.

Area linking is uni-directional, so if areas 7 and 10 for example, are to work in tandem there must be

two area link messages sent; one message to link area 7 to area 10 and one message to link area 10 to

area 7.

In the example below areas 7-12 are all independent areas that can be controlled with standard preset

messages. Assigning them to base link area 6 means that if and when required, any of the six areas

shown can be linked to any of the other areas causing it to listen to another area‟s messages as well as

its own. It could be possible; for example, if all areas indicated by base link area 6 were to be used

together for a function, all the areas could be linked and controlled together with a single DyNet

message.

Area 7

Area 8

Area 9

Area 10

Area 11Area 12

Area 2

Area 3

Area 4

Area 5

Area 14

Area 13

Base

Area 6

Area linking can also be used to provide a pseudo global Area other than Area 0. It is possible to create

a pathway of light through a number of different areas by sending a single control message to the base

link area.

network watchdog

Fail safe operation of the Philips Dynalite system can be maintained through the Network Watchdog

feature. This involves broadcasting a special data packet (the Watchdog Tick) to all load controllers

across the network at programmed intervals. If a particular controller does not receive these messages

within a predefined period, the controller will default to an assigned panic preset or to a specific preset

stored in the load controller. This ensures that all controllers revert to a safe operating state should any

part of the network cabling be physically severed, or there is a load controller failure.


status indicator tracking

All user control panels incorporate LED status indicators on all buttons that can be used to indicate the

current preset state of an Area. When a Preset message is transmitted on the network, any indicators

will illuminate on any user control panel button that is also assigned to that Area Preset automatically

and without the need for additional network messages. Indicators for buttons assigned to other presets

within the same Area will turn off. In this way the panels will always indicate the current state of an

area.

In some circumstances it may be necessary to change the state of some or all button status indicators on

a user control panel. The Philips Dynalite system enables status indicators to be controlled

independently using an appropriate physical command message. It is also possible to change the state of

specific button status indicators while leaving others in their current state.

diagnostic functions

The Philips Dynalite system also supports a number of advanced diagnostic functions, which include

Device Online/Offline status, Circuit Breaker Trip Reporting and Circuit Run Time Tracking.

Device Online/Offline status enables all devices to be periodically polled to determine if they are visible

on the network and operating normally. Invoking this function in Envision software ensures that network

or device failures are identified promptly.

Load controllers that incorporate the Circuit Breaker Trip reporting function will broadcast a message on

the DyNet network when a load circuit breaker on the controller trips. The message identifies the

Physical device and channel affected by the tripped circuit breaker. These messages can be used to

alert maintenance personnel of faults so that remedial action can be promptly carried out.

Controllers that support Circuit Run Time tracking will continuously record the accumulated operating

time for each output channel. Run time data for each controller can be queried or reset at any time.

This information can be used by a site management system for scheduling periodic maintenance, such as

lamp replacement intervals on lighting fixtures.

the physical network

Philips Dynalite systems utilise RS485 as its physical network, which is an industry standard method of

data transmission as detailed in the TIA/EIA-485-A specification, with some variations. (For more

information on the TIA/EIA-485-A specification: www.tiaonline.org)

The TIA/EIA-485-A specification defines a UL (Unit Load), which declares that an RS485 driver must be

able to drive 32 ULs. This means that an RS485 network supports 32 nodes, when each node bears a unit


load on the line. Philips Dynalite products use 1/8 UL drivers and we recommend up to 128 devices on a

network segment.

Another important variation from the TIA/EIA-485-A specification is the addition of an extra conductor

that carries a DC supply, which is generated by an integral power supply contained within all mains

powered load control devices which is used to energise network devices that are not connect to mains

power, such as motion detectors, wall mounted control panels and timer clocks.

Figure 1: Typical small DyNet Network

Devices are simply connected with a general purpose 3 twisted pair and shield data cable that loops

around to all devices as depicted in Figure 1. If using CAT5 cable the 4th pair can be left as a spare or

used as a drain wire. The connections are as follows:

Note the conductors that carry the DC supply are both wires in the pair paralleled. This

is to avoid the DC supply suffering voltage drop on long cable runs. A 5-way pressure

pad terminal strip is provided on devices for data cable termination. All devices also

have RJ12 connector for temporary connection for commissioning. Some DIN rail load

controllers support two RJ12 connectors for faster termination within the distribution

board.

Terminal Cable Recommended Colour Coding

Shield Drain wire (or CAT5 spare pair) Shield (or Brown pair)

GND 1 pair paralleled Green pair

D+ ½ pair Blue

D- ½ pair Blue / White

+12V 1 pair paralleled Orange pair


Some sites require far more devices than the 128 maximum allowed on a single network. A typical

application is a multi story building, with each floor containing a network of devices. The network

segment for each floor is called a Spur. All spurs are joined together via a Trunk, which is quite often

installed in a riser, linking all floors together.

Larger DyNet Network utilising trunk & spur technology

Each of the floors can run an independent sub-network that does not require any input from other

devices. With each of the floor sub-networks being connected together by bridges on the trunk site-wide

network messages can be sent that will affect the whole project, allowing the entire system to work

together as one. Typically the Trunk is where computer head-end software or BMS will be connected so

there is full access to all the required components of the network.

Note the spurs do not directly connect to the trunk, but are connected via Network Bridges. A Network

Bridge has two RS485 ports that are optically isolated from each other, which will assist to isolate any

faults to a single spur only and also provide galvanic isolation. The use of Network Bridges allows the

maximum number of devices on a single network to be 16,776,960. Network Bridges may also be used as

repeaters when cable runs exceed 1,000 metres. In addition to optical isolation, the Network Bridge can

also be configured as a network filter for stopping unrelated messages being transmitted onto irrelevant

sections of the network, therefore reducing the number of network messages. The Gateways can also be

used to run task on a floor so that when it receives a message from the truck requesting the system


change to “After hours” mode, the gateway can then send out the required messages on the sub-floor

network to comply.

dynet 2 protocol properties

Packet Length: Variable, 12 to 1024 bytes

Integrity Checking: 16 bit Fletcher Checksum

Baudrate: 9600 baud to 460800 baud (device dependant)

Data Word Format: 8 bit data, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit, no parity (8N1)

Message Tracking: Source network address embedded in each packet

Logical Areas: 65534, 0 = All Areas

Logical Presets per Area: 65519 editable, 16 predefined

Logical Channels per Area 65534, 0 = All Channels

Fade times per message: 0 to 23.3 hours @ 100mS resolution

Physical Channels per device: 65534, 0 = All Channels

Physical Device Types: 254

Physical Box Numbers per Device Type: 65535


technical guide emergency lighting

Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Emergency Lighting Page 1 of 7


Non-maintained emergency luminaires

Maintained emergency luminaires

Sustained emergency luminaires

Testing emergency lighting

Egress mode upon changeover to a standby generator

Load shedding upon changeover to a standby generator

Automatically bypassing circuits from a load controller

Glossary of emergency lighting terms

There is a common requirement for emergency lighting to be used alongside general lighting connected

to a control system. There are a few different ways of achieving this, the most appropriate method is

dependent on the type of emergency lighting fixture and control equipment used. Following is a

description of several different techniques and their respective deployment methods. Sometimes it will

be necessary to combine two or more techniques to achieve the desired outcome.

self-contained luminaires

There are three common types of Self Contained Luminaires (also known as Single Point Luminaires):

maintained luminaires

This is an exit or emergency luminaire, where the lamps used for emergency lighting also operate under

normal supply. The lamps used in these luminaires are often fluorescent, with a dimmable ballast and

can be controlled in exactly the same manner as a normal dimmable fluorescent luminaire.

Supply:

230V

1 Phase E

DyNet

RS485

AU

X

+1

5V

D + D -

GN

D

SH

IEL

D

N

L

µP

DALI /1-10V / DSI

Maintained EmergencyLighting Luminaire

Battery Pack

Dimmable Ballast

Lamp

Maintained

Normal

Neutral

DALI / 1-10V / DSI

DALI / 1-10V / DSI

Maintained Luminaires have two line inputs. One is connected to the controlled lighting output of the

load controller. The Maintained input is connected to the load side of the load controller‟s circuit

breaker, which supplies power to charge the internal battery and to use as a signal to turn the lamp on

in the event of a power

Page 2 of 7 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Emergency Lighting

failure. In this example the Maintained Luminaire is also used for Normal Lighting, it‟s ballast is

dimmable so ballast control lines are shown. Commonly used control protocols are DALI, DSI and 1-10V.

non-maintained luminaires This is an exit or emergency luminaire, where the lamps used for emergency lighting only operate when

the normal supply fails. The lamps used in these luminaires are often incandescent such as the small

“Spitfire” halogen lamp and the larger, sealed beam flood lamp units.

Supply:

230V

1 Phase E

DyNet

RS485

AU

X

+1

5V

D + D -

GN

D

SH

IEL

D

N

L

µP

DALI /1-10V / DSI

Maintained EmergencyLighting Luminaire

Dimmable Ballast

Lamp

Maintained

Normal

Neutral

DALI / 1-10V / DSI

DALI / 1-10V / DSI

Battery Pack

Non-Maintained Luminaires are connected to the load side of the load controller‟s circuit breaker, which

supplies power to charge the internal battery and to use as a signal to turn the lamp on in the event of a

power failure. This connection method allows full control of the normal lighting while providing for

emergency lighting in the event of a circuit breaker trip or power supply failure.

sustained luminaires

This is an exit or emergency luminaire with two or more lamps where at least one lamp operates in non-

maintained mode and is only illuminated when normal supply fails. The other lamp operates on the

normal supply only. This is identical in functionality to having a Non-Maintained Luminaire and a Normal

Luminaire both in the same housing.

Supply:

230V 40A

1 Phase E

DyNet

RS485

AU

X

+1

5V

D +

D -

GN

D

SH

IEL

D

N

L

µP

Maintained

Normal

Neutral

Normal Lighting Luminaire

N

LLamp

Battery Pack

Non-MaintainedEmergency Lighting Luminaire

Lamp


Sustained Luminaires have two line inputs. One is connected to the Normal lighting output of the load

controller. The Sustained input is connected to the load side of the load controller‟s circuit breaker,

which supplies power to charge the internal battery and to use as a signal to turn the lamp on in the

event of a power failure. In this example the normal half of the sustained luminaire is used for normal

lighting, it is dimmable through leading edge. This method can also be applied to dimmable ballast

control lines that use protocols DALI, DSI and 1-10V.

essential supply load shedding

Some sites are equipped with a standby generator, which will automatically start upon failure of normal

supply and after operating parameters are reached, will switch part or all of the site from the normal

supply circuit to the generator‟s output, resulting in the site being re-energised some 10 to 20 seconds

after normal supply failure. Quite often the standby generator is coupled with a UPS (Uninterruptible

Power Supply), which ensures there is no power dropout during the changeover period. In theory, the

lighting system should operate as it would on normal supply, but in practice it is often desirable to

modify it‟s behaviour. Two common reasons for doing this are:

The Standby Generator does not have the power capacity required to operate the site normally.

In this case it is desirable to place the lighting system into a load shedding mode.

The site should not be occupied while normal power is not available. In this case it is desirable

to place the lighting system into an egress mode.

To change the operating mode, the lighting system must be made aware that the generator has now

come online. This is typically carried out via a relay that actuates when the generator is online, (or

sometimes via a relay that actuates when the normal supply fails) providing a dry contact signal to an

input unit on the lighting control network, such as a DDMIDC8 Multifunction Input Interface. Once the dry

contact signal is detected, the DDMIDC8 will then transmit a network message along Dynet to activate

the required load shedding.

DDMIDC8

DBC410

CH4

CH3CH2CH1

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

EL1

1 Phase

40 AMP

Standby Generator

Dry Contact

Lighting Control Network


egress mode

To meet the load shedding requirements of the project the DDMIDC8 unit can lock out all control user

interface devices such as wall mounted control panels, touchscreens, motion detectors etc, to prevent

occupants from interfering the required action and selects a global egress lighting preset, which is pre-

defined to illuminate egress paths and reduce lighting in workspaces to assist in alerting occupants that

something is amiss. When normal power is restored the DDMIDC8 restores normal control functionality.

load shed mode

The DDMIDC8 can instruct all load controllers to use a different set of presets than the normal ones.

Consider the example of a room with two channels of lighting and a control panel that recalls four

presets:

During normal operation, presets 1-4 are recalled from the control panel. In load shed mode the

DDMIDC8 uses a part of the DyNet featureset called „Preset Offset‟, which instructs the load controllers

to recall presets 5-8. This function can target a single or group of rooms or more commonly, the whole

site. If it is desirable that no lighting is on at all in particular rooms in load shed mode, then all load

shed presets are set to 0%. This method has the advantage of minimal impact on the site, as lighting

levels in particular rooms are not disturbed if they are already off or at low levels.

maintaining circuits by bypassing load controllers

When there are only a small number of circuits to be maintained when a site changes over to a standby

generator or UPS, a simple solution is to bypass the lighting control system with contactors that connect

the circuits to be maintained directly to the essential supply.

Panel Normal Presets Load Shed Presets

HIGH 1 - CH1= 100%, CH2 = 100% 5 - CH1= 60%, CH2 = 20%

MED 2 - CH1= 70%, CH2 = 70% 6 - CH1= 60%, CH2 = 20%

LOW 3 - CH1= 40%, CH2 = 40% 7 - CH1= 40%, CH2 = 20%

OFF 4 - CH1= 0%, CH2 = 0% 8 - CH1= 0%, CH2 = 0%

HIGH

MED

LOW

OFF


In this scenario the non-essential supply is used to hold a contactor closed, connecting the lamp to the

load controller. When the non-essential supply fails the load controller will be de-energised as will the

contactor, which will connect the lamp to the essential supply.

glossary of emergency lighting terms

anti-panic area lighting - The part of emergency escape lighting provided to avoid panic and provide

illumination allowing people to reach a place where an escape route can be identified.

central battery system - An emergency lighting system where the exits and emergency lighting are

supplied from a common power source when there is a power failure (usually for all the emergency

luminaires on one lighting sub-circuit, but sometimes for all emergency luminaires in a complete

building).

combined mode - An exit or emergency luminaire with two or more lamps where at least one lamp

operates in non-maintained mode. Typically refers to a two-lamp luminaire where one lamp operates on

the normal supply only and the other only when normal supply fails. Also known as „Sustained Mode‟.

emergency lighting - The lighting provided for use when the supply to the normal mains lighting

installation fails.

emergency luminaire - A luminaire designed for use in an emergency lighting system. Exits can serve as

emergency luminaires if classified in accordance with the relevant local standard. Emergency luminaires

can be designed to operate as both normal lighting and emergency.

Non-Essential

Supply

DBC410

CH4CH3CH2CH1

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

EL1

Essential

Supply

ContactorLamp

Load Controller


escape route lighting - Lighting provided to ensure that the means of escape can be effectively

identified and safely used when a location is occupied.

exit luminaire - An emergency luminaire designed to serve as an Exit sign.

high risk task area lighting - Emergency lighting provided to ensure the safety of people involved in a

potentially dangerous process or situation and to enable proper shut down procedures.

luminaire - A lighting fixture, the housing of which includes items for fixing, protecting and operating

the lamps.

maintained luminaire - An exit or emergency luminaire where the lamps used for emergency lighting

also operate under normal supply.

non-maintained luminaire - An exit or emergency luminaire where the lamps used for emergency

lighting only operate when the normal supply fails.

normal lighting - Standard electric lighting luminaires operating from the normal supply.

rated duration - The manufacturers declared duration for a battery operated emergency lighting unit,

specifying the time for which it will operate after mains failure. This is normally one or three hours

when fully charged.

recharge period - The time necessary for the batteries to regain sufficient capacity to achieve their

rated duration.

self contained luminaire - An emergency luminaire or exit sign with all control gear and battery pack

housed within the luminaire. Also known as a Single Point Luminaire.

single point emergency lighting system - Emergency lighting system using self-contained emergency

luminaires and exit signs.

single point luminaire - An emergency luminaire or exit sign with all control gear and battery pack

housed within the luminaire (also known as a Self Contained Luminaire).

slave luminaire - An emergency luminaire without its own batteries, which is designed to work in

conjunction with a central battery system.

standby lighting - The part of emergency lighting that may be provided to enable normal activities to

continue in the event of a mains supply failure.


sustained luminaire - An exit or emergency luminaire with two or more lamps where at least one lamp

operates in non-maintained mode and only illuminates when normal supply fails. The other lamp

operates on the normal supply only. Identical in functionality to having a Non-Maintained Luminaire and

a Normal Luminaire both in the same housing (also known as Combined Mode).


technical guide LED control

Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – LED Control Page 1 of 10

overview

Offering exceptional life, versatile control flexibility and unlimited colour mixing potential, LED sources

are becoming increasingly prevalent in architectural lighting applications. The vast range of LED fittings

and sources now available provides a multitude of creative illumination design possibilities. Harnessing

this potential requires a sophisticated control system. Philips Dynalite has responded to this need and

developed a comprehensive range of controllers, designed to directly connect and drive most popular

conventions of LED fittings and sources. This guide outlines LED fitting circuit design concepts and

provides instruction on selecting appropriate dimming control solutions.

LED fundamentals

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are semi-conductor devices that emit photon energy (light) when an

electrical current is passed through them. Detailed below is the electrical symbol that is commonly used

to represent an LED.

Anode(+) Cathode(-)

Like any diode, LEDs pass current in one direction only, from Anode to Cathode and block current in the

reverse direction. To produce light a voltage needs to be applied, which exceeds the LED’s internal

voltage drop (VF) in order for current to flow. VF is generally in the range of 0.7 – 4V and varies

depending upon the material composition of the LED. The graph below plots the characteristic of a

Lumileds Luxeon LED in the light emitting range. If the applied voltage is less than VF (about 3.2V) then

current will not flow and the LED will not emit light.

Page 2 of 10 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – LED Control

The light output level or brightness of an LED is generally directly proportional to the magnitude of

forward current (IF). (See figure below)

LEDs are also designed to deliver optimum performance at their rated nominal current. Typical nominal

current ratings for LEDs used in fittings generally range upward from 20mA through to 350mA. More

recent technological developments on ultra-bright LEDs have also seen the release of products with

nominal current ratings up to 1A.

The current through an LED should never exceed the device’s nominal rating, otherwise permanent

damage may result. For this reason, provision must be included with an LED fitting or the controller

supplying the LED fitting, to regulate diode current to the correct level.

diode current regulation

The simplest method of driving an LED is to apply a DC voltage Vs to the LED with a resistor R in series.

This will control the current and protect the LED. The forward current (IF) can be controlled by selecting

a suitable resistor.

R

IF = (VS – VF)/R

For the Luxeon LED above to run from a 12V supply at 350mA with a VF of 3V, it would require a resistor

value of:

R = (VS – VF)/IF = (12 – 3)/0.35 = 25.7 ohms

The nearest standard value resistor value is 27 ohms.

The power dissipated in this resistor would be:

P = V x I = (VS – VF) x IF

= (12 – 3) x 0.35

= 3.15 W


The LED uses 0.35 X 3 = 1.05 W

This circuit delivers an efficiency of 1.05/(1.05 + 3.15) = 25 %

Although series resistance can provide a convenient means of regulating current, there are often

undesirable energy-efficiency implications as noted from the calculations above. There is also another

major disadvantage to using this method; at the manufacturing stage, LEDs are sorted into ranges (or

bins) of VF which is measured at a constant current. Each bin is then supplied as a specific brightness;

however there are variations in each range.

The table above relates to the Lumileds Luxeon LED that is designed to be driven at a constant current

of 350mA. LED fittings commonly contain many LEDs that are connected in series and parallel arrays. If

these LEDs were driven by a constant voltage supply the variation of up to 1.2V between VF(min) and

VF(max) in two parallel branches, which is nearly 30% of VF(typ), would result in noticeably different

brightness levels of LEDs across the array. It is possible to provide some compensation for this by

including a current limiting resistor in each branch so that any variation in VF has a less significant

impact on branch current.

Another method of driving an LED is to include a constant current regulator, which eliminates any

variations due to inconsistencies in VF. To create a constant current regulator, a closed loop sensing

circuit is required to monitor the current. This generally involves a sense resistor in series with the LEDs

to determine the level of current. Discrete three terminal regulators such as the Motorola LM317 are

often used for this purpose as outlined in the diagram below.

The LM317 maintains 1.25V between VOUT and VADJ, with IADJ negligible and constant.

IN OUT

ADJ

LM317 R Sense


Therefore the current though the LEDs is:

I = 1.25/Rsense

For a 350 mA LED Rsense would be 1.25/0.35 = 3.6 Ohms

When controlling multiple LEDs from a single constant current source, the LEDs should be connected in

series to ensure the current in each LED is identical. If LEDs are connected in parallel the variation in VF

will again lead to different currents and therefore different brightness in each branch. As outlined

previously, this can be improved by including a current limiting resistor in each branch so that any

variation in VF has a less significant impact on branch current. However in this case if an LED in one

branch of a parallel array fails to an open circuit state, the current normally delivered to that branch

will be driven through the other branches causing the LEDs to operate above their rated current and

potentially fail.

LED dimming

It is possible to dim LEDs by simply reducing the current through the device. However, operating an LED

below rated nominal current can result in a number of undesirable effects such as colour shift. An

alternative to simple current regulation is Pulse Width Modulation (PWM). This technique dims the LED

by supplying the nominal current at a variable duty cycle, which enables a much greater dimming range.

50% brightness is achieved with a 50% duty cycle. The frequency of the PWM is generally 100 Hz or

greater, so that flicker is not discernable by the human eye. The following graphs illustrate PWM output

for a range of dimming levels.

V

t

V

t

V

t

V

t

30% 50%

70% 100%

All Philips Dynalite controllers dim LED loads using pulse width modulation (PWM) ensuring that LEDs are

always driven at the correct forward current.


LED circuit modes

The circuit configuration of LED fittings can be broadly classified in two basic types – current mode and

voltage mode. Voltage mode LED fittings incorporate integral current regulation circuitry and are

designed for connection to a nominal voltage supply. Following is the circuit diagram for a typical

voltage mode LED fitting.

IN OUT

ADJ

LM317 3.6O 1W 1%

Supply:

24VDC

Current mode LED fittings have no internal current regulation and therefore must be connected to a

constant current supply. Following is the circuit diagram for a typical current mode LED fitting.

Supply:

350mA

The data sheet provided for an LED fitting will generally indicate whether it is a current or voltage mode

device. Philips Dynalite produces fully dimmable controllers for both types of load.

common orientation

LED fittings often incorporate more than one branch circuit. This is quite prevalent with colour mix

fittings that have a circuit for each primary colour (RGB). One end of each circuit is generally connected

together to form a common. The orientation of the common will of course vary depending on which end

of the circuits are connected together. The orientation of an LED controller and LED fitting must match

to ensure correct operation. For this purpose LED fittings and LED controllers are broadly classified as

either common anode or common cathode.

Common anode fittings as the name suggests, incorporate a common connected to the anode end of

each LED circuit as illustrated below. Therefore the individual output channel polarity of common anode

controllers must be negative with a positive common.


CH3

CH2

COM

CH1

Conversely, common cathode fittings incorporate a common connected to the cathode end of each LED

circuit. In this case the individual output channel polarity of common cathode controllers must be

positive with a negative common.

CH3

CH2

COM

CH1

In both cases the common is not necessarily at ground potential and should therefore never be

connected to a supply ground at any point.

The orientation of proprietary LED fittings currently available is predominantly common anode. For this

reason Dynalite LED controllers are designed to provide common anode output. Common cathode

configuration is available as an option on certain Dynalite LED controllers. Please refer to product data

sheet for specific option detail.

controller selection - voltage mode fittings

Selecting a suitable controller for voltage mode fittings is a straightforward process. First it is necessary

to select a controller that can deliver the nominal fitting voltage. The data sheet for a typical constant

voltage fitting will generally include values for the power consumed by the fitting and also the required

nominal voltage VF. Certain Philips Dynalite controllers which incorporate an integral power supply

deliver a specific output voltage i.e. 24VDC, in line with popular nominal voltage conventions. Other

Philips Dynalite controllers utilise external power supplies permitting a range of output voltages

dependant upon the voltage of the external power supply. For multi-circuit fittings the common

orientation should also be confirmed as compatible with the controller output. Finally, the controller

channel output current capacity should be selected to exceed the connected load. The total load can

be easily calculated by multiplying the total number of fittings per channel by the current per fitting. If

only the power rating of the fitting is available the following expression can be used:


IT = n x PF

VN

IT = Total current per channel

PF = Power rating of LED fitting

VN = Nominal voltage of fitting

n = Number of LED fittings per channel

The controller selection process for voltage mode fittings can be summarised as follows:

Select output voltage to match fitting nominal voltage.

For multi-circuit LED fittings confirm common orientation aligns with controller.

Select output current rating to exceed connected load.

The following table summarises the current range of Philips Dynalite voltage mode controllers.

Item Code DDLEDC401 DDLEDC605

Controller Voltage 24VDC,

12VDC (optional)

18-32VDC,

12-15VDC selectable

Common Orientation Common anode

Common cathode (optional)

Common anode

Channels 4 6

Output current per channel 1A 5A

Total controller load 20A

Power supply Integral mains 240VAC External safety extra low voltage

Housing DIN Rail DIN Rail

controller selection - current mode fittings

The considerations for selecting an appropriate controller for current mode fittings relate more to the

controller’s internal capacity to dissipate energy. This is because a constant current driver regulates the

current flow through the LED circuit by effectively absorbing any excess voltage to maintain the nominal

current level. In general, drive circuit internal power dissipation and thus heat generation is inversely

proportional to the number of LEDs in series. Circuits with fewer LEDs in series will have greater heat

generation in the drive circuit for a specific supply voltage. Therefore it is ideal to be aware of the

power dissipation limits of the controller during the fitting design process.

The first step in selecting a suitable controller is to determine the appropriate supply voltage and

confirm it falls within the maximum and minimum limits applicable for the controller. Following are

calculations for determining these limits.

Maximum Supply Voltage


VS max = PC + (n x VF) or VC max, whichever is the lesser ID

VS max = Maximum supply voltage

PC = Max controller internal power dissipation per channel

ID = Nominal LED current

n = Number of diodes in series per channel

VF = LED forward voltage

VC max = Maximum controller voltage

Minimum Supply Voltage

VS min = 4 + (n x VF) or 12VDC, whichever is the greater

VS min = Minimum supply voltage


VF = LED forward voltage

Once again, for multi-circuit fittings the common orientation should be confirmed as compatible with

the controller output. The final step is to calculate the controller internal power dissipation and ensure

it is within the controller’s limits. Following is the expression that should be used to determine this.

PD = (VS - (VF x n)) x ID

PD = Power dissipation per channel

VS = Supply voltage

VF = Diode forward voltage


ID = Nominal diode current

It is sometimes necessary to increase the number of LEDs or introduce Zener diodes in series to increase

the total VF and therefore reduce the internal power dissipation.

The controller selection process for current mode fittings can be summarised as follows:

Confirm required supply voltage is within acceptable limits for the controller.

For multi circuit LED fittings confirm common orientation aligns with controller.

Calculate and ensure internal power dissipation is within controller limits.


The following table summarizes the range of Philips Dynalite current mode controllers. Item Code DLEDC-48 DDLEDC60035

Controller Voltage 36VDC 18-32VDC,

12-15VDC selectable

Common Orientation Common anode Common anode

Channels 48 (16xRGB) 6

Nominal Output Current 17-50mA software adjustable 350mA

Max internal power dissipation 0.4 Watts per individual channel 6 Watts combined total for consecutive pairs of

channels (Ch 1&2, Ch 3&4, Ch 5&6). 4 Watts

per individual channel.18 Watts box total

Power Supply Integral mains 240VAC External safety extra low voltage

Housing Wall Mount DIN Rail

current mode controller alternatives

Current mode fittings can be driven by a voltage mode controller if a current regulator such as the

LM317 is included in the load circuit. The advantage of this is that the voltage mode controllers can

deliver more power than constant current controllers and therefore more fittings can be driven from the

one controller.

The following circuit diagrams demonstrate the capacity of each controller to drive multiple current

mode LED arrays.

CH4

COM

DyNet/DMX512

RS485

AU

X

+15VD + D -

GN

D

Shi

eld

Supply:

28-30VDC 5A

+

-

E

µP

CH3

COM

CH2

COM

CH1

COM

CH5

COM

CH6

COM

DDLEDC605

IN OUT

ADJ

LM317

IN OUT

ADJ

LM317

IN OUT

ADJ

LM317

IN OUT

ADJ

LM317 8.2O 0.25W 1%

IN OUT

ADJ

LM317

8.2O 0.25W 1%

8.2O 0.25W 1%

8.2O 0.25W 1%

8.2O 0.25W 1%

LED Fitting, 25 x Nichia NFSW036T LEDs

The DDLEDC605 can drive up to a total of 20A at 24V – A total of 480W including dissipated power.


CH4

COM

DyNet/DMX512

RS485

AU

X

+1

5V

D + D -

GN

D

Sh

ield

Supply:

230V 1A

1 Phase

A

N

E

µP

CH3

COM

CH2

COM

CH1

COM IN OUT

ADJ

LM317

IN OUT

ADJ

LM317

IN OUT

ADJ

LM317

RED

GREEN

BLUE

3.6O 1W 1%

3.6O 1W 1%

3.6O 1W 1%

DDLEDC401

The DDLEDC401 can drive up to a total of 4A at 24V – A total of 96W including dissipated power.

CH4

COM

DyNet/DMX512

RS485

AU

X

+15

V

D + D -

GN

D

Sh

ield

Supply:

27VDC 2A

A

N

E

µP

CH3

COM

CH2

COM

CH1

COMRED

GREEN

BLUE

CH5

COM

CH6

COM

RED

GREEN

BLUE

DDLEDC60035

The DDLEDC60035 can drive up to a total of 2.5A at 24V – A total of 60W including dissipated power.


DLight and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd. Luxeon is the registered trademark of Lumileds

Lighting U.S., LLC. Motorola is the registered trademark of Motorola Inc.

technical guide load compatibility

Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Load Compatibility Page 1 of 9

overview

Load compatibility is critical when specifying lighting and corresponding control systems. This document

deals with each of the common lamp types and associated control gear. Where appropriate, different

methods of control are also discussed.

mains voltage incandescent lamps (including tungsten & tungsten-halogen sources)

All mains voltage incandescent lamps can be dimmed using Philips Dynalite leading and trailing edge load

controllers. To calculate the connected load, simply multiply the lamp wattage by the number of lamps.

As these are primarily resistive loads, power factor remains at unity.

When specifying the current ratings of the lighting controllers, it is important to note the inrush current

of cold filament lamps. This is usually in the region of 14 to 17 times the running current, but for a split

second. Philips Dynalite protected controllers are fitted with 'Type C' MCB's. This means that in most

cases it is possible to fully load the controller with no need to take account of de-rating. Philips Dynalite

controllers are also fitted with a 'soft start' feature to protect lamps; however if large wattage (500W

and above) lamps are being used, care should be taken to avoid fully loading the MCB's. A 10-15% margin

is suggested to avoid any possibility of 'nuisance tripping' of the breakers.

low voltage tungsten-halogen & halogen-xenon lamps

These lamps include burner lamps and reflector lamps, both dichroic and metal reflector types (MR11 &

MR16). They have traditionally been dimmed via a suitably rated iron-core transformer and leading-edge

phase-control Philips Dynalite Load Controller. Every Philips Dynalite dimming controller has a

symmetrical output voltage waveform (the majority of 'economy' domestic wall-box dimmers do not

guarantee that the output waveform will be symmetrical and could therefore damage the transformers).

A wide variety of transformer types are now commonly available. These should be selected carefully

and matched to the appropriate controller type and capacity from the Philips Dynalite range. Common

transformer types include:

electronic – leading edge dimmable transformers

In general, their losses are less than those of a traditional iron-core dimmer. Add 10% to the total lamp

wattage on a circuit (then divide wattage by mains voltage to determine load current). This provides a

margin for transformer losses when calculating circuit loadings. See "Do's & Don'ts" following for

additional precautions.

Page 2 of 9 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Load Compatibility

These transformers are for low voltage lighting applications. If there are multiple transformers on a

dimmed lighting group, this can initiate a substantial spike when the circuit is switched on due to the

cumulative effect of their input capacitors.

electronic – trailing edge dimmable transformers

These transformers are intended for use only with trailing edge controllers. Their suitability should be

documented in literature provided with the transformer or they should be labeled accordingly. These

style of transformers are typically physically smaller is size making them more suitable for track-lighting

applications or decretive low voltage lamp fittings. A de-rating factor of 10% should be included for

transformer efficiency.

Note: Trailing edge controllers can also be used on mains-voltage filament lamps and on most other

electronic transformers, but not on iron core transformers.

electronic – non-dimmable transformers

These transformers should not be connected to a dimming controller, unless the controller is configured

as a switched output only or damage to the transformer may occur. These types of transformers should

only be driven from a relay unit. A de-rating of 10% should be allowed for.

electronic – DSI/DALI/1-10V transformers

These four wire transformers are operated in exactly the same manner as an HF fluorescent electronic

ballast. Refer to the respective section under fluorescent lighting for compatibility details.

standard ferro-magnetic – ‘E&I’ (economy) transformers

As the name implies, these transformers are constructed from two pieces of laminated steel cores, one

shaped like an 'E'. The wire-winding bobbin is placed over the centre leg of the 'E' and the 'I' is then

clamped over it alternately to close off the mechanical structure. These are perfectly acceptable for

leading-edge dimming applications providing they are manufactured without defect and are used on a

'one transformer per lamp' basis. Transformer losses of around 10% should be considered when

calculating actual loads. In particularly hot environments, it is appropriate to allow for 20% losses.

standard iron core, wire-wound – toroidal transformers

These transformers are wound onto a doughnut shaped iron core. They are more difficult to wind than

the 'E&I' type and so have a higher manufactured cost. They are generally quieter than the economy

transformers, but can generate excessive heat and audible noise if the transformers are potted in epoxy.

Toroidal transformers are popular for building into ELV downlights due to their physical shape. Leading-

edge dimming controllers are suitable for their control.


do’s and don’ts of dimming low voltage transformers

When dimming low voltage lamps, Philips Dynalite recommends the specification of one lamp per

transformer. There are several reasons for this:

In the event of transformer failure, only the single lamp is extinguished. The transformer is also

readily accessible as it will be near the extinguished lamp.

If larger capacity transformers are used to control multiple lamps, any variances in cable length will

be manifested in different luminous outputs; the longer the cable, the less light will be observed

coming from the source.

Some transformers can be noisy when dimmed. This is often the case for larger transformers

(especially 'E' and 'I' types), some electronic transformers and toroidal transformers that are potted

in a fixture.

Large transformers are prone to nuisance tripping with MCB's at switch on, although the soft start

features of Philips Dynalite controllers will minimise this risk. The problem is due to the highly

inductive nature of the transformer coupled with the high inrush current of the lamps. Sometimes

large transformers cannot be avoided for stretched-wire or parallel rod distribution systems. These

transformers are usually a component part of the system and should have an integral provision for

fast protection against overload or short circuit of the conductors.

Large wire-wound transformers have high energy losses and poor output voltage regulation.

Some transformers are not suitable for dimming. Please refer to the Philips Dynalite Transformer

Compatibility Guide under the “Technical Support” link on the Philips Dynalite website for further

information.

For effective phase control dimming, minimum loads may apply, depending on the transformer type

or load characteristic of the connected lighting fixtures. Lighting circuits comprising a single low

voltage fitting of 20W or less may exhibit some instability for this reason. Please refer to controller

data sheets or consult a Philips Dynalite representative for advice on minimum loads.

Four-wire transformers (DALI, DSI, 1-10V) require a pair of cables for the control signal, in addition to

the mains feed. Local supply regulations must be observed when wiring mains and control cables, as the

control terminals on the transformers or controllers are not rated as SELV. Mains voltage must never be

applied to the control signal terminals or cables.


fluorescent lighting

There are many different fluorescent lamp types available. As a general rule, those lamps with four pins

are dimmable. Those lamps with two pins and integral starters or those with domestic BC or ES base are

not dimmable. The dimming range of these lamps is a function of the fluorescent ballast connected to

the lamp.

electronic dimmable DALI ballasts

DALI (Digital Addressable Lighting Interface) is a data protocol and transport mechanism that was jointly

developed and specified by several manufacturers of lighting equipment. The common platform of DALI

enables equipment from different manufacturers to be connected together.

DALI is a step on from the DSI protocol, which is used by HF fluorescent ballasts. One of the main

advantages that DALI has over earlier systems is that each device on a segment of data cable can be

separately addressed, as DSI and 1-10V devices are not separately addressable and can only be

controlled as a group. The net result is that to achieve similar control functionally, DALI requires less

complex (and therefore less expensive) wiring topology than DSI or 1-10V devices.

DALI distributes the control intelligence into each luminaire. This enables precise control when used in

conjunction with appropriate Philips Dynalite devices and systems. A DIN-rail mounted Philips Dynalite

DDBC120-DALI communicates on a single pair data cable to a "Universe" of up to 63 other DALI devices.

The input to this Controller is standard DyNet RS485, thereby enabling seamless integration between the

DALI devices downstream and a normal DyNet system upstream that could include intelligent wall mount

control panels, sensors and an economical desktop browser interface. Unlike systems that have adopted

DALI as the protocol for all devices, the Philips Dynalite approach does not reduce the number of DALI

nodes with each additional sensor or wall mounted control panel. DALI ballasts are individually

addressable and enable unique instruction about switching and illuminance to be conveyed to each lamp,

each zone or each universe (64 nodes max. by definition) from a single instruction. The Philips Dynalite

Controller is fully bi-directional, enabling critical status information from each luminaire to be reported

elsewhere over the DyNet network.

Circuit allocation and data wiring may be determined without reference to each other. Data cable is

non-polarised, 2-core mains-rated cable with a maximum network length of approximately 300 metres

(1.5mm2 cable). Each DALI universe must be commissioned, at which time up to 16 Groups may be

assigned. This information is stored in each DALI ballast, as is the individual address, scene value and

Power on level. Fade rates are very restricted in DALI, so they are undertaken in the flexible DyNet

system.


The Philips Dynalite DDBC120-DALI offers mains disconnection to the local universe by responding to the

combined 'Off' state of all ballasts. It then electrically disconnects Active supply from the load to

eliminate standby power consumption of ~7 VAR per ballast. This energy conservation measure can

provide significant cost benefits in commercial installations where a large numbers of ballasts are

installed. DALI control is phase independent.

The single phase power relay switching of the DBC120-DALI may be fed through a contactor for a multi-

phase universe. A de-rating of 10% should be allowed for.

electronic dimmable DSI ballasts

Tridonic manufactures a popular fluorescent ballast type that operates on a proprietary digital protocol

known as DSI. Its control signal comprises an 8-bit asynchronous serial command string that is

transmitted at 1200 Baud.

Philips Dynalite's analogue ballast controllers are software selectable to operate DSI type ballasts. These

have the advantage of being addressable by the lighting controller and hence by the upstream DyNet

network. Options include On & Off and dimming level. A maximum fade rate of 1.5 seconds is provided

in the ballast. Slower fade rates are determined in the Philips Dynalite controller and are not visually

perceptible. The ballast type determines the minimum Illuminance possible. In general 1% is achievable

by most ballasts (due to our visual response, this does not appear to be as low as one might imagine).

It is possible to leave the mains permanently connected to the ballast and use the DSI signal to switch

the lamp off, but be aware that the DSI transformer consumes ~7 VAR per ballast while switched off.

This may become an energy savings issue, especially in commercial sites with large numbers of ballasts.

Note that this ballast requires a pair of cables for the control signal, in addition to the mains feed.

Some DSI controllers, such as the Philips Dynalite DBC410 have an integral relay on each circuit, to

switch off mains supply to the lighting circuit when set at 0%. A de-rating of 10% should be allowed for.

DSI is a mid-range controllable ballast solution, but unlike DALI, lacks the ability to address luminaires

individually. A separate data cable is required to connect from the Philips Dynalite Ballast Controller to

each managed group of lights. This does not present a problem where large numbers of lights share a

common controlled level.

Control is generally in the forward direction; that is, from the controller to the load. While a single

back-channel is afforded in the specification, it is not supported by all ballasts. Where feedback is

available, it indicates lamp failure only.


electronic dimmable 1-10V ballasts

Many parts of the world still prefer this solution, due to its economy at the component level. Philips

Dynalite has a wide range of Ballast Controllers for this application, including both DIN-rail mounted and

conventional Black Box configurations (DDBC or DBC product code prefix).

The primary disadvantage of "1-10 volt" dimming is the necessity to separately isolate supply to each

switched zone; hence controllers range from 5 to 20 amps per channel in both single and 3-phase supply.

A dedicated power sub-circuit and a control pair are provided for connection to each zone of lighting.

The controllers also provide the necessary mains switching relays as required in 1-10 volt applications. A

de-rating of 10% should be allowed for.

The single pair data cable that controls 1-10-volt ballasts is also polarised. Accidental reversal of these

cables to any single ballast greatly reduces the dimming range of all connected ballasts in the chain. If

the chain is interrupted at any point, the fault-free side of the chain returns to full light output. There

is no information fed back to the controller with this type of ballast.

Most analogue ballasts are interchangeable, with the notable exception of proprietary '0-10 volt' ballasts

that use zero volts to electronically switch off the lighting.

electronic ballasts - standard

These ballasts are not dimmable, but can be controlled by relay controllers.

do’s and don’ts of dimming fluorescent lighting

In new installations or when the lamps have been changed, the new lamps should be "burnt-in" by being

switched full on for at least 100 hours before any attempt is made to switch off or dim them. This will

improve the visual dimming performance and lamp life. Please check with the lamp manufacturer for

specific advice.

Due to the fact that different type and wattage lamps may have different dimming curves, it is advisable

not to mix fixtures with different lamp types on the same dimmer channel.

cold cathode (glow discharge) lighting

Cold cathode lighting is common in coffer lighting applications and in signage. It is most useful in areas

where access for re-lamping is restricted as the tube life can exceed 80,000 hours. Neon lamps, as they

are more commonly called, are available in three principle types, based on the Argon, Neon or Krypton

gas that is used to fill the glass envelope. Their ability to be dimmed is dependent on the materials

involved.


Argon gas-filled tubes are the easiest to dim. Red Neon gas-filled tubes can be dimmed, but over a

reduced range, with the tube diameter being significant to performance. A minimum of 10mm is

required; the larger diameter, the better is the likely outcome for dimming.

In general, Leading Edge Controllers are suitable for dimming cold cathode. The best results are

obtained where the dimmer's output semiconductor is rated at or above 5 Amps (BTA41 or larger).

Smaller controllers, such as the DDMC802 are not suitable. The dimmed channel concerned should be

protected by an MCB.

cold-cathode transformers

A transformer should be of electronic or iron core construction and approved by the manufacturer for

dimming with a leading edge dimmer. If using a dimmable electronic transformer, de-rate the dimmer

channel by 10%. If using an iron-core transformer, de-rate the dimmer channel by 60% and ensure that

any power factor correction capacitors are removed. This should be checked carefully, as some types of

transformers have the power factor correction capacitor buried inside the resin fill, making it difficult to

remove.

If the transformer is an OCP (Open Circuit Protection) type, ensure that it is suitable for dimming, as

many OCP transformers are not. This type of transformer has circuitry that will automatically

disconnect the transformer’s output in the event of a tube breakage.

cables

GTO (gas tube oil ignition) cables should not be of the braided type. GTO cables between the neon and

transformer should not be longer than 6 metres and separated from each other by at least 100mm.

Avoid running GTO cables near metal or in metal conduits. If metal conduit must be used, try to use a

non-ferrous alloy type.

discharge lamps (including metal halide, mercury vapour and high pressure sodium)

These styles of lamps are traditionally switched only. When controlling these types of lamps it is

important to use the larger rated relay devices such as the DDRC240FR to the DDRC1220FR units. The

20A relay units are better suited for handling the inrush requirements of this style of lamps.

When calculating the REAL current for the switching device it is most important NOT to assume that the

connected load can be calculated by multiplying the lamp wattage by the number of lamps. For

example, a 150W Metal Halide lamp has a starting current of 2.4A. This level of current demand lasts

for several minutes after switch on, so it is therefore essential that these loads be carefully calculated

to avoid nuisance tripping of circuit breakers.


Some manufactures of discharge lamps support dimming, this is done using protocols like 1-10V or DALI

traditionally found in ballast dimming. If compatible then this style of lamp may be dimmed in the same

way as florescent ballasts. Manufactures instructions of the control for these lamps should be carefully

followed as incorrect use could damage the lamp or reduce its expected life span.

led lighting

With the increasing rate of technological development on ultra-bright LED’s, luminaires utilising these

sources are becoming more prevalent in architectural applications. There is now an extensive range of

proprietary LED lighting fittings available in the market. Philips Dynalite LED controllers use the widely

adopted pulse width modulation (PWM) technique to regulate lumen output of LED fixtures. As the name

suggests this technique simply involves altering the on time duration of a clock or square wave supply to

the fittings.

LED fittings generally incorporate a number of LEDs connected in a series-parallel circuit array. There

are a number of circuit designs that are emerging as popular conventions. Consideration of the circuit

type is necessary when selecting a controller with the appropriate output, particularly when dimming is

required. Following is an outline of circuit design attributes that are used to classify an LED fitting for

controller selection.

Mode This relates to how LED current is biased. Voltage mode fittings incorporate integral

current limiting devices and are designed for direct connection to a nominal supply

voltage. Alternatively, current mode fittings do not include facility to limit current and

therefore must be connected to a constant current supply.

Rated Input Nominal supply voltage and current.

Configuration This applies to multi channel fittings (i.e. RGB) designed for colour mixing applications,

and designates whether the channels are internally connected as common anode or

common cathode.

Philips Dynalite has developed dedicated LED controllers that cater to a wide range of fitting design

types and it should be noted that mains voltage LED fittings are also available.

Certain types of these mains voltage fittings include an integral regulating power supply with facility for

a control input signal such as 0-10V and DALI. Dynalite ballast controllers may be readily used for these

types of fittings in the same way as an electronically dimmable fluorescent luminaire. Mains voltage LED

fittings without a control input may also be connected to a relay controller when simple on off control is

required.


Some mains powered LED fittings are compatible with leading or trailing edge dimming technologies.

Care needs to be taken to make sure that the fittings are compatible. Some LED fittings will have a

reduced dimming range and may produce a “flicker” when dimmed. This can be overcome by using

Philips Dynalite editable dimming curves and an active load that is connected to the leading edge output

channel.

Some flicker may still be present from main supply instability.

2011 Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited (ABN 97 095 929 829). All rights reserved. Not to be reproduced without permission. Dynalite, DyNet DLight and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited.

technical guide programming methods

Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Programming Methods Page 1 of 8

overview

The approach to programming a Philips Dynalite system can be broadly categorised as; system

configuration, preset editing and function programming. This document outlines the various methods

available for programming in all categories.

system configuration

System configuration is the process of assigning base parameters for all devices. This includes

designation of device network addresses, arranging controller output channels and user interface

devices into logical groups and setting command actions for each point, i.e. user control panel button,

dry contact input, sensor state etc.

preset editing

Preset editing entails the setting of controller output channel levels for all output states or scenes

required.

function programming

Function programming involves the creation of control logic and routines for automated system

operation. Typical examples would include provision of entry and egress scenarios, join or base link

functions for combining partitioned areas in a ballroom etc.

System configuration and function programming requires a personal computer attached to the products

or the DyNet network via a DTK622-USB PC Node. The PC Node converts the RS485 DyNet into a serial

communication format suitable for connection to a PC. Philips Dynalite has developed a range of

intuitive software for complete configuration, operation and management, from ‘wizard’ style

configuration tools through to comprehensive site management solutions. A Philips Dynalite

representative should be consulted for advice on the most appropriate software for a specific

application.

For the purpose of providing an overview of Philips Dynalite system programming, this document will

outline the Windows-based Envision configuration software. This application provides a comprehensive

configuration and programming environment that enables the following parameters to be set;

Preset scenes

Fade times

Sequencing

Channel names

Timer clock events

Touchscreen programming

Network address

Logical channel numbers

Join mask

Analogue options

Dimmer curves

Panic functions

Non-dim options

Maximum & minimum level

Page 2 of 8 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Programming Methods

When system configuration has been completed it is also possible to edit presets using a range of

interface options. This enables users to make and save adjustments to lighting levels without the need

for specialist knowledge or equipment. The popular interface options for user preset editing are also

outlined in this document.

programming with Envision

Envision is a Windows-based program that will run under the Windows 98, 2000, XP, Vista and Windows

7 operating systems. It is the ideal tool for larger systems and for those who prefer using Windows-

based programs. This graphics-based software is extremely powerful, whilst still being quick and easy-to-

use. The following screens are an example of some of the facilities offered by Envision.

Figure 1. Network View Dialogue Box

Figure 1 illustrates the physical view of an office installation. It displays all devices on the network,

indicating the network box address for each device. Clicking any device in this view will show the

device’s standard in a dialogue box.

For a dimmer, this dialogue enables logical areas to be

assigned to each channel. In addition, it is possible to set

logical channels for each physical circuit in the dimmer. This

is sometimes referred to as ‘softpatching’. This dialogue

also enables channels to provide non-dimming switched

on/off control.

Figure 2. Configuration Dialogue Box


Figure 4. Logical View Dialogue Box

All other devices in a Philips Dynalite system are configured in a similar way. Clicking a ‘Universal

Panel’ will show the configuration dialogue for that panel. The standard configuration dialogue for a

Universal Panel enables the default area and fade-time to be set for the area it controls.

From this dialogue, it is possible to custom configure

each individual button on the panel. This makes

available a number of custom features and allows a

single wall mounted user control panel to control

multiple panels. Having shown a number of the

screens available in the Physical View where

products are configured specifically for an

installation, it is then possible to move into the

Logical View, where preset scenes are set.

The dialogue box below shows the logical screen for each of the areas in an office that employs dimming.

Each of these buttons is a unique area on the network. By selecting a button, the program moves to the

logical view of the lighting scene for that area.

Figure 3. Advanced Configuration Dialogue Box


The logical view for the area has a ‘virtual’ fader for each logical channel in that area, a ‘virtual’ push button

for each scene and several additional features designed to speed up programming of the lighting within the

area.

The dialogue below is for the ground floor main reception area of the office project. All the information

needed for programming this area is displayed on one screen.

The ‘Area Name’ is particularly useful when working on

large and complex systems. In this example, there are

12 logical channels. Each channel has a virtual fader

comprising a ‘knob’, up and down indicators and a %

level display at the bottom of the fader. This displays

in 1% increments from 0 to 100%. An ‘X’ in this

position indicates an ‘ignore’ (or ‘don’t care’) setting.

There are eight preset buttons. On selection of a button, the virtual faders immediately move to the set

levels for each logical channel. It is possible to program live, so that changes take immediate effect or

to ‘silent’ program, by selecting mute, so as not to disturb the occupants of a space.

Once a preset has been programmed, it is then ‘saved’ into the dimmer(s) memory. To simplify the

process of configuring a large number of dimmers to similar preset levels, the software utilises a ‘copy’

command. This enables any current scene to be copied and then saved as a new scene and modified.

One of the major advantages of Envision is that it is possible to program settings off-site and simply

download to the system once on-site.

Refer to Envision Training Guide for more information on this software.

programming with user control panels

‘one-touch’ control panel

The simplest form of effecting preset adjustments is through a ‘one-touch’ panel. This function can be

applied to one or more channel and a complete logical area.

Figure 5. Preset Editing Dialogue Box


STEP 1

A simple button push toggles between ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’.

STEP 2

Holding down the button raises and lowers the lighting circuit or

circuits, which are connected to the button. To alternate between

‘UP” and ‘DOWN’, stop pushing for a moment, then hold down again.

The level that is selected is saved and restored when the lights are

turned off and then on again.

fader program panel

Another convenient approach for preset adjustments is the use of ‘hold down’ programming on a fader

panel.

STEP 1

To program preset scenes, press ‘MANUAL’

STEP 2

Adjust channel levels using sliders.

STEP 3

Press and hold down the button to which the settings are to be

stored for at least 5 seconds. Repeat this process for the other

presets. The preset scenes are now stored and can be recalled by

pressing the relevant buttons on this panel, or other panels in the

same area.

programmable preset panel

The programmable preset panel provides a compact and cost effective solution for adjusting lighting

levels on multiple channels, within a single area.


STEP 1

Select preset to be changed by pushing buttons 1 - 4. The button LED

will indicate current scene.

STEP 2

Hold down the PROGRAM button until all button LEDs light up

(approximately five seconds). The chosen preset button LED will

flash.

STEP 3

To increase or decrease the brightness of all channels at

the same time, press the up, down or off button until

the required brightness is reached.

STEP 4

To set the level of an individual channel, press the desired

button, 1 – 4. The button LED will indicate which channel is

selected. When more than 4 channels are to be set, press 1

twice for channel 5, press 2 twice to select channel 6, press

1 three times to get channel 9 etc. (Each press of the button

increases the active channel number by 4.)

STEP 5

Press the UP, DOWN or OFF buttons until the lamps on the

selected channel reach the desired level. Select the next

channel and change in the same way.

STEP 6

When all channels of the preset scene have been established,

press PROGRAM again and the levels will be stored to the

current preset. To program another preset, repeat steps 1-

6.

When all channels of the preset scene have been established, press

PROGRAM again and the levels will be stored to the current preset. To

program another preset, repeat steps 1-6.


Notes:

1. There is no technical limit to the number of channels that can be programmed using this

method. In practice, it is suitable for up to around 16 channels. Above that number,

programming using either the DPP601 portable programmer, or a laptop computer with

Envision software.

2. In some applications, it may be necessary to prevent the programming function being used

by unauthorised personnel. This can be achieved using a keylock to enable or disable the

programming mode.

portable hand-held programmer

The DPP601 portable programmer is ideal for those who do not

wish to connect to the network via a laptop or find the local

control panels too limited in their scope. The unit is lightweight,

compact and simple-to-use. A generous back-lit LCD screen

provides on-line information, confirming the currently selected

scene number or name; channel number or name; % level of the

selected scene; area number or name and the fade time.

It is possible to select a scene, then ‘call up’ channels within that scene and set their levels, either using

the ramp up/down keys, or by entering % levels on the keypad. Once the scene has been modified it can

be saved to the dimmer’s memory. The DPP601 can be plugged into the DyNet network via a user

control panel, programming point as provided on dimmers, or any existing programming socket.

touchscreen

The DTP100 & DTP170 Touchscreens are

versatile user interfaces that incorporate

255 pages, which can be customised to

application requirements. There are a

number of different ways a preset can be

programmed using the DTP100 & DTP170.

Dedicated pages can be configured to clearly

represent the area being controlled and

programming panels and slider panels can be

emulated. The example below outlines a

Figure 6. DPP601 Portable Programmer

Figure 7. Programming preset scenes using a DTK100 Touchscreen


typical programming page for a meeting room. This page can be password protected to prevent

unauthorised access.

When the page opens the sliders will move to display the current levels of each channel in the room.

1. Select a preset scene to adjust using the buttons at the bottom of the page.

2. Move the sliders until the desired lighting level is reached.

3. Press the ’save’ button on the right hand side of the page to store the new levels into the load

controller. These levels become the new preset.


Envision and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

technical guide systems integration

Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Systems Integration Page 1 of 9

overview

Integration between various control systems within projects, reduce end-users need to have multiple

interactions to perform what seems like one task such as “play DVD” or “arm security system”. To

perform this function, many different control system elements need to work together. By using different

Philips Dynalite gateways, these elements can be coordinated together to produce a seamless

performance.

Philips Dynalite provides several different methods for interfacing with other services, such as building

management systems (BMS), projector controllers and audio-visual controllers, blind motors and other

third components. This guide outlines some examples of differing techniques.

DyNet over RS485

All Philips Dynalite products communicate using the DyNet protocol which uses RS285 for

communication. A subset of Dynet commands has been made available to anyone wishing to directly

communicate with the Philips Dynalite system. Many AV controller, alarm system and BMS vendors also

make available software drivers that can communicate directly with the Philips Dynalite system using

DyNet messages. This allows the system to be operated as an open protocol. The drawing below

illustrates connection of a BMS directly onto the DyNet bus. In this method, command direct from the

BMS server can be sent to the lighting control system.

To assist in the development of communications drivers for DyNet, we have developed an “Integrator‟s

Handbook”, a copy of which is available on request from local Philips Dynalite dealers.

Page 2 of 9 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Systems Integration

DyNet over RS232

DyNet message packets can also be sent and received over RS232 networks. The Philips Dynalite DTK622-

232 unit is a passive network gateway that converts RS485 to RS232 for full duplex communication that

allows AV systems that use RS232 to simply send Dynet commands directly.

For more advanced integration that requires network message filtering or logical processing, the

DMNG2322 gateway is ideal. This gateway has advanced features enabling it to receive custom RS232

data strings that can trigger a task or send a Dynet message on the RS485 port. An example of this is

shown bellow.

The device can also be used to send custom RS232 data strings to other third-party devices triggered

from Dynet messages. This can allow third-party systems such as AV to be controlled from Philips

Dynalite pushbutton panels.

LonWorks

The Philips Dynalite DDNI-LON provides a LON interface to the DyNet network, via a TP/FT10 LonWorks

port. Lighting SNVTs (standard network variable type) are supported, as well as user-defined types. The

device can typically translate up to 100 presets in 30 areas.


The diagram above illustrates the cascading of multiple DDNI-LON devices to accommodate a DyNet

network with more than 30 areas.

The device can also be used to trigger complex tasks for changing a project mode. For example, a BMS

system manages the scheduled events and uses LON to communicate to the various systems throughout a

project. A single LON message can be sent that can change the Philips Dynalite system to operate

between “after hour” and “trading hours” mode. This can change the operation from panel function to

sensor timer out, if required.

BACnet

BACnet integration allows for BMS system to send commands to the Philips Dynalite system triggering

functions and timed events. In a Philips Dynalite system that is of a trunk and spur topology, the BACnet

gateway can be connected directly to the network trunk giving it access to all of the system devices.

The BACnet protocol uses addressable points for communication; these addressing points can be adjusted

by the BMS for triggering required functions such as timed events or the Philips Dynalite system for

reporting back current system status.

An example of the kinds of functions that can be achieved is when the BMS system enters “After hours”

mode, a request can then be sent to the Philips Dynalite lighting control system via the BACnet protocol

to turn off all the lighting on a particular floor. The lighting control system can then flash the lighting

off, warning any occupants still on the floor that they need to interact their continuing occupation of the

area by pressing an “afterhours” button or the lighting control system could use passive presence

detectors for detecting occupants. If no occupants have indicated their presence, then the Philips

Dynalite control system will switch off the lighting and report this back to the BMS so that the air-

condition plant can also be automatically shut down.

This kind of integration allows for one system to control many different elements within an area.

TCP/IP Internet-Ethernet

Ethernet connectivity

Philips Dynalite supports a wide range of Ethernet gateways for different mounting requirements.

DNG100BT Wall box mounted and mains powered

DDNG100BT DIN rail mounted and mains powered

DMNG100BT Modular mounted and network powered


Using Ethernet gateways allows for networking multiple Dynet RS485 networks together or allows for

integration to web-based systems.

In a typical application of a high-rise office building, each floor will have its own Philips Dynalite system

operating independent of each other. On each of the floors the network uses Dynet RS485 to

communicate between the different devices. To coordinate the different floor systems together, each of

the separate sub systems can be linked together via an Ethernet using gateways. A high speed Ethernet

trunk is run between the floors of the building allowing for site-wide command to be sent while each of

the floors use a network gateway to spur off and start the network.

In applications where the distance between the Philips Dynalite devices exceeds the RS485 network

limit, such as interconnecting separate buildings or linking control centres in a tunnel. These distances

can be overcome by running fiber optic cables between the sites and having them connected together

via Ethernet gateways.

The Ethernet gateways also support the feature of providing remote control of a residential site via a

web browser interface or Philip Dynalite DynamicTouch software. This remote control functionality can

be made available from external locations by making the gateway visible on the Internet, as well as

providing remote control within the dwelling via hand-held computing devices such as Palm Pilots, i-

Pads and web tablets, via connection to a Wi-Fi hub.

Ethernet connectivity products

Connection of Philips Dynalite RS485 to the Ethernet is achieved using one of the Ethernet Gateways. It

can be configured to use the TCP/IP protocol and has an inbuilt web server that can be configured to

serve up pages allowing control of the lighting control system via a web browser.

EnvisionManager Server software is designed to provide high-level integration and control options to a

DyNet network via Ethernet. The DyNet network is connected to a server PC‟s COM or USB port and

information can then be exchanged via client software running on the server PC or clients connecting

remotely over the Ethernet network using TCP/IP.


Integration to other services is made simple by the use of a set of calls for an industry standard DCOM

interface. EnvisionManager can use client software such as Traypan which is an inexpensive solution for

providing occupants of open plan office space with control over their local environment. TrayPan client

software is provided with EnvisionManager and can provide control of the local lighting from the tool

tray of desktop PC‟s. It uses the existing LAN to communicate with EnvisionManger server software.

When used for occupancy detection, additional cost benefits can be made from not having the provision

of local control panels and sensors that would otherwise be required.

A web page with an ActiveX control is another inexpensive option of client control. The optional

EnvisionManager Toolbox Software Development Kit provides a rapid integration environment for

connection to BMS. A set of system calls and example clients, including source code, are provided to

assist with development of integration solutions and custom clients. As well as control and status

reflection of the lighting system, alarm events such circuit breaker trips and lamp failures can be

automatically forwarded to the BMS. Diagnostic and maintenance data such as lamp burn time is also

readily available.

infrared

infrared reception

Philips Dynalite sensors are multi-function devices; incorporating motion detection, light level

measurement and infrared reception. Infrared signals from hand held remote controls are received by

the sensors and can be translated into DyNet messages, which can then recall a lighting scene of trigger


a complex task. These messages can also be translated into other formats via network gateways, such as

into ASCII text strings via the DNG232 Network Gateway or back into infrared via the DIRTX8 Infrared

Transmitter. Philips Dynalite offers a range of hand-held remote controls for use with the Philips

Dynalite sensor range. The codes from these remote controls can be used to program most models of

unified programmable or „leaner‟ remote controls.

infrared transmission

The DIRTX8 Infrared Transmitter is an 8-channel device, commonly used to integrate equipment with an

IR port, such as AV controllers and airconditioners, onto the DyNet network. These IR transmissions can

be triggered from any Philips Dynalite user interface such as a pushbutton panel or even a motion

sensor. Multiple IR codes can be programmed to transmit with the press of one button by using the

inbuilt task engine.

A typical situation is where small IR emitters are fixed to the IR window of Hi-Fi equipment. The IR

emitter includes a one-metre lead terminated with a 2.5mm plug, which is plugged into the DIRTX8.

Multiple channels allow the DIRTX8 to transmit individual codes out on each channel, which eliminates

problems where different Hi-Fi components share the same code. The DIRTX8 can record and store

macros that are executed in response to DyNet messages on the RS485 network.

analogue and dry contact inputs

For receiving analogue and dry contract inputs, the DDMIDC8 unit meets the integration requirements.

The unit can receive eight dry contact inputs and four analogue inputs. When a dry contact closure is

detected, the unit can perform a wide variety of functions such as recall a scene or perform a control

room join. As the unit also has a task engine, multiple functions can be performed from a single contact

closure.

The unit can also receive 1-10V analogue input and directly translated this into Dynet channel level

messages.

Both styles of inputs can be used at the same time so that when a contact closure is detected the

analogue inputs are then enabled. This kind of function could allow a user who wants to use a single

rotary pot to control very large lighting loads that could not normally be controlled in such a format.

dry contact outputs

Philips Dynalite offers several dry contact units that can be used for interfaces, as well as load control.

Two of the more common models comprise eight sets of changeover contacts for added flexibility; the

DDRC810DT-GL (DIN rail mount) and the DRC810DT (wall mount). These outputs are suitable for

connection to SELV circuits.


CNO

NCCNO

NCCNO

NCCNO

NCCNO

NCCNO

NCCNO

NCCNO

NC

CH1CH2CH3CH4CH5CH6CH7CH8

IN1

A/D

A/D

A/D

A/D

IN2IN3IN4IN5IN6IN70V IN85V

Dry Contact & Analogue Inputs

Dry Contact Outputs

Supply:

230V 0.1A 1 Phase

E

DyNet

RS485

AUX

+15V

D +

D -

GND

SHIELD

N L

µP

A/D

A/D

A/D

A/D

The electrical drawing above is of the DRC810DT. Note that in addition to the dry contact outputs, this

device also has the eight programmable dry contact/analogue inputs described earlier.

analogue outputs

Philips Dynalite ballast controllers can be configured for 0-10V output, providing a ready means of

communicating a control variable to another system. The DDBC1200 illustrated below should be used

where connection to SELV circuits is required.

Supply:

230V 0.5A

1 Phase

N

0CH

2

CH

1

0CH

3

CH

4

00

0-10V / D

SI

0CH

6

CH

5

0CH

7

CH

8

000CH

10

CH

9

0CH

11

CH

12

00

µP

0-10V / D

SI

0-10V / D

SI

0-10V / D

SI

0-10V / D

SI

0-10V / D

SI

0-10V / D

SI

0-10V / D

SI

0-10V / D

SI

0-10V / D

SI

0-10V / D

SI

0-10V / D

SI

AUX

+15V

D +

D -

GND

LE

DMX512

dual port load controllers

Many Philips Dynalite load controllers are available with dual ports, which allow a separate control

network for DMX512 signals, while still allowing the use of the main control system. The DyNet network

can be used to control the behavior of the system in response to DMX signals, such as the selection of the

circuits for which DMX512 control is allowed. It is also possible to only allow partial control of a circuit

via DMX512, in the form of setting a “low limit”, which is useful for allowing partial control of critical

circuits such as egress lighting, but never allowing these circuits to be switched off or dimmed to an

unacceptably low level.


The diagram above illustrates the use of dual port load controllers.

converting Dynet to DMX512

A common requirement for buildings such as hotels, museums and other sites with a lighting control

system is to connect outdoor architectural lighting to the Philips Dynalite network. Often this style of

fixture operates on DMX512 communication protocol. The Philips Dynalite DNG485 Network Bridge

converts DyNet into 64xchannels of DMX512 signals.

converting DMX512 to Dynet

DMX512 can also be converted into DyNet channel level messages. This would be typically be achieved

by connecting a theatrical lighting desk onto a DyNet network gateway DNG232, removing the need for

the lighting control devices to be double ported for DMX512, apart from a single interface. This method


should only be used for smaller systems requiring 16 channels of DMX512 addressing of the lighting

control system.


Envision and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd. LonWorks & LON are the registered trademarks of

Echelon Corporation. Wi-Fi is the registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Allliance. Palm Pilot is the registered trademark of palmOne Inc.

HyperTerminal is the registered trademark of Hilgraeve Inc. ActiveX is the registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Date post:	23-Oct-2015
Category:	Documents
Upload:	luis-lopes
View:	225 times
Download:	23 times

2011 Technical Binder

Documents